Fix ChangeLog for "FAIL: -Bsymbolic-functions" for cris-linux in ld
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
b90efa5b 3@c Copyright (C) 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 4@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 5@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
6@include configdoc.texi
7@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 8@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 9@c man end
252b5132
RH
10
11@c @smallbook
12
ff5dcc92
SC
13@macro gcctabopt{body}
14@code{\body\}
15@end macro
16
0285c67d
NC
17@c man begin NAME
18@ifset man
19@c Configure for the generation of man pages
20@set UsesEnvVars
21@set GENERIC
0285c67d 22@set ARM
ac145307 23@set C6X
49fa1e15 24@set H8300
0285c67d 25@set HPPA
0285c67d 26@set I960
0285c67d 27@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 28@set M68K
833794fc 29@set MIPS
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
35c08157 32@set NDS32
78058a5e 33@set NIOSII
2a60a7a8
AM
34@set POWERPC
35@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
36@set Renesas
37@set SPU
38@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 39@set WIN32
e0001a05 40@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
41@end ifset
42@c man end
43
9160ea82
AM
44@ifnottex
45@dircategory Software development
46@direntry
252b5132 47* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
48@end direntry
49@end ifnottex
252b5132 50
0e9517a9 51@copying
e49e529d
JM
52This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
53@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
54@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
55@end ifset
56version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 57
b90efa5b 58Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 59
cf055d54 60Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 61under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
62or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 65section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 66@end copying
252b5132
RH
67@iftex
68@finalout
69@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 70@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 71@titlepage
71ba23f6 72@title The GNU linker
252b5132 73@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
74@subtitle @code{ld}
75@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77@end ifset
252b5132
RH
78@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79@author Steve Chamberlain
80@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
81@page
82
83@tex
84{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
85\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 87\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
88\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89}
90\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91@end tex
92
93@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 94@c man begin COPYRIGHT
b90efa5b 95Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 96
0285c67d 97Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 98under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
99or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
100with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
101Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 102section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 103@c man end
252b5132 104
252b5132
RH
105@end titlepage
106@end iftex
4ecceb71 107@contents
252b5132
RH
108@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
109
84ec0e6d 110@ifnottex
252b5132 111@node Top
71ba23f6 112@top LD
e49e529d
JM
113This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
114@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
115@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
116@end ifset
117version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 118
cf055d54 119This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
120Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
121in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 122
252b5132
RH
123@menu
124* Overview:: Overview
125* Invocation:: Invocation
126* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
127@ifset GENERIC
128* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
129@end ifset
130@ifclear GENERIC
131@ifset H8300
132* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
133@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
134@ifset Renesas
135* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
136@end ifset
137@ifset I960
138* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
139@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
140@ifset ARM
141* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
142@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
143@ifset M68HC11
144* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
145@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
146@ifset HPPA
147* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
148@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
149@ifset M68K
150* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
151@end ifset
833794fc
MR
152@ifset MIPS
153* MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
154@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
155@ifset POWERPC
156* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
157@end ifset
158@ifset POWERPC64
159* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
160@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
161@ifset SPU
162* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
163@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
164@ifset TICOFF
165* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
166@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
167@ifset WIN32
168* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
169@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
170@ifset XTENSA
171* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
172@end ifset
252b5132
RH
173@end ifclear
174@ifclear SingleFormat
175* BFD:: BFD
176@end ifclear
177@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
178
179* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
180* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 181* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 182* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 183@end menu
84ec0e6d 184@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
185
186@node Overview
187@chapter Overview
188
189@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
190@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 191
0879a67a 192@ifset man
0285c67d 193@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 194ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
195@c man end
196
197@c man begin SEEALSO
198ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
199the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
200@file{ld}.
201@c man end
202@end ifset
203
204@c man begin DESCRIPTION
205
ff5dcc92 206@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 207their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 208compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 209
ff5dcc92 210@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
211a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
212to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
213
0285c67d
NC
214@ifset man
215@c For the man only
ece2d90e 216This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
217@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
218language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
219@end ifset
220
252b5132 221@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
222This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
223to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
224write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
225@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
226available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
227@end ifclear
228
229Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
230linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
231execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 232@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
233(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
234
0285c67d
NC
235@c man end
236
252b5132
RH
237@node Invocation
238@chapter Invocation
239
0285c67d
NC
240@c man begin DESCRIPTION
241
ff5dcc92 242The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
243and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
244you have many choices to control its behavior.
245
0285c67d
NC
246@c man end
247
252b5132
RH
248@ifset UsesEnvVars
249@menu
250* Options:: Command Line Options
251* Environment:: Environment Variables
252@end menu
253
254@node Options
255@section Command Line Options
256@end ifset
257
258@cindex command line
259@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
260
261@c man begin OPTIONS
262
252b5132
RH
263The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
264practice few of them are used in any particular context.
265@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 266For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
267object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
268link a file @code{hello.o}:
269
270@smallexample
271ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
272@end smallexample
273
ff5dcc92 274This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
275result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
276the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
277directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
278
ff5dcc92 279Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
280point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
281as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
282which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
283files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
284different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
285occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
286option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
287noted in the descriptions below.
288
289@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
290Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
291together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
292options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
293an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
294
295Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
296specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
297and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
298are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
299message @samp{No input files}.
300
36f63dca 301If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
302assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
303augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
304linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
305permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
306or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
307@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
308script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
309extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
310to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
311the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
312
313For options whose names are a single letter,
314option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
315whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
316option that requires them.
317
318For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 319precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 320@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 321this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 322only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
323@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
324name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
325output.
326
327Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
328option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
329immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
330@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
331Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
332accepted.
252b5132 333
36f63dca
NC
334Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
335(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
336prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
337compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
338
339@smallexample
2509a395 340 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
341@end smallexample
342
343This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
344silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
345may also arise when passing options that require values through a
346driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
347a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
348and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
349the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
350
351@smallexample
352 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
353@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
354
355Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
356linker:
357
ff5dcc92 358@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 359@include at-file.texi
dff70155 360
2509a395
SL
361@kindex -a @var{keyword}
362@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
363This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
364argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
365@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
366@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
367to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
368
7ee314fa
AM
369@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
372@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
373specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
374will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
375finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
9d5777a3 376it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
7ee314fa 377This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
9d5777a3 378interface.
7ee314fa 379
252b5132
RH
380@ifset I960
381@cindex architectures
2509a395
SL
382@kindex -A @var{arch}
383@item -A @var{architecture}
252b5132
RH
384@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
385@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
386In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
387Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
388@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
389the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 390archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
391family}, for details.
392
ff5dcc92 393Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
394other architecture families.
395@end ifset
396
397@ifclear SingleFormat
398@cindex binary input format
399@kindex -b @var{format}
400@kindex --format=@var{format}
401@cindex input format
402@cindex input format
403@item -b @var{input-format}
404@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
405@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
406file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 407@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 408that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 409configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 410to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
411default input format the most usual format on each machine.
412@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
413supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
414formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
415@xref{BFD}.
416
417You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
418binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
419linking object files of different formats), by including
420@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 421particular format.
252b5132
RH
422
423The default format is taken from the environment variable
424@code{GNUTARGET}.
425@ifset UsesEnvVars
426@xref{Environment}.
427@end ifset
428You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
429@code{TARGET};
430@ifclear man
431see @ref{Format Commands}.
432@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
433@end ifclear
434
435@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
436@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
437@cindex compatibility, MRI
438@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
439@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 440For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 441files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
442@ifclear man
443@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
444@end ifclear
445@ifset man
446the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
447@end ifset
448Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 449the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
450scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
451If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
452specified by any @samp{-L} options.
453
454@cindex common allocation
455@kindex -d
456@kindex -dc
457@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 458@item -d
252b5132
RH
459@itemx -dc
460@itemx -dp
461These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
462compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
463even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
464script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
465@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
466
7ee314fa
AM
467@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
468@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
469@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
470@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
471Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
472@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
473specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
474will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
475option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
9d5777a3 476The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
7ee314fa 477
252b5132
RH
478@cindex entry point, from command line
479@kindex -e @var{entry}
480@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 481@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
482@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
483Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
484program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
485named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
486and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
487base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
488@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
489and other ways of specifying the entry point.
490
b58f81ae
DJ
491@kindex --exclude-libs
492@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
493Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 494exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
495@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
496automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
497port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
498explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
499option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
500be treated as hidden.
501
e1c37eb5
DK
502@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
503@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
504Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
505should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
506into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
507may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
508used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
509the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
510match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
511command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
512of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
513regardless of this option.
514
252b5132
RH
515@cindex dynamic symbol table
516@kindex -E
517@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 518@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
519@item -E
520@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
521@itemx --no-export-dynamic
522When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
523option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
524all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
525set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
526
527If you do not use either of these options (or use the
528@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
529dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
530referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
531
532If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
533back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
534dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
535linking the program itself.
536
55255dae 537You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 538be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 539See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 540
8b747e1a
DK
541Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
542support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
543the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
544
36f63dca 545@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
546@cindex big-endian objects
547@cindex endianness
548@kindex -EB
549@item -EB
550Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
551
552@cindex little-endian objects
553@kindex -EL
554@item -EL
555Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 556@end ifclear
252b5132 557
2509a395
SL
558@kindex -f @var{name}
559@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
560@item -f @var{name}
561@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
562When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
563to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
564table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
565symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
566
567If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
568run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
569the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
570first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
571@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
572in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
573Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
574implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
575machine specific performance.
576
577This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
578will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
579
2509a395
SL
580@kindex -F @var{name}
581@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 582@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 583@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
584When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
585the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
586of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
587on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
588
589If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
590run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
591dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
592filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
593found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
594used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
595@var{name}.
596
ff5dcc92 597Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 598toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
599object files.
600@ifclear SingleFormat
601The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 602@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 603@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
604environment variable.
605@end ifclear
606The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
607creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 608
3dbf70a2 609@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
610@kindex -fini=@var{name}
611@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
612When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
613executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
614address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
615the function to call.
616
252b5132
RH
617@kindex -g
618@item -g
619Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
620
2509a395
SL
621@kindex -G @var{value}
622@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 623@cindex object size
2509a395 624@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
625@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
626Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
627@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
e8044f35 628MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
252b5132
RH
629sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
630
631@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 632@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 633@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 634@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
635@itemx -soname=@var{name}
636When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
637the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
638which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
639linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
640field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
641
642@kindex -i
643@cindex incremental link
644@item -i
645Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
646
3dbf70a2 647@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
648@kindex -init=@var{name}
649@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
650When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
651executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
652of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
653function to call.
654
252b5132 655@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 656@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 657@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 658@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
659@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
660Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
661list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
662If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 663will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 664will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 665
ff5dcc92 666On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
667files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
668and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
669called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
670@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
671indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
672to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
673@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
674
675The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
676specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
677was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
678command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
679archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
680the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
681
ff5dcc92 682See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
683archives multiple times.
684
685You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
686
687@ifset GENERIC
688This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 689if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
690behaviour of the AIX linker.
691@end ifset
692
693@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 694@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 695@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 696@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 697@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
698Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
699for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
700option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
701in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
702on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 703@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
704order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
705how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
706option is specified.
252b5132 707
9c8ebd6a 708If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
b3b9c41d
HPN
709by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the @samp{--sysroot} option, or
710specified when the linker is configured.
9c8ebd6a 711
252b5132
RH
712@ifset UsesEnvVars
713The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 714@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
715some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
716@end ifset
717
718The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
719@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
720at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
721
722@cindex emulation
723@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 724@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
725Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
726emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
727
728If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
729@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
730
731Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
732configured.
733
734@cindex link map
735@kindex -M
736@kindex --print-map
737@item -M
738@itemx --print-map
739Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
740information about the link, including the following:
741
742@itemize @bullet
743@item
3b83e13a 744Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
745@item
746How common symbols are allocated.
747@item
748All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
749which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
750@item
751The values assigned to symbols.
752
753Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
754involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
755have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
756linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
757of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
758the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
759linker script containing:
760
761@smallexample
762 foo = 1
763 foo = foo * 4
764 foo = foo + 8
765@end smallexample
766
767will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
768option is used:
769
770@smallexample
771 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
772 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
773 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
774@end smallexample
775
776See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
777scripts.
252b5132
RH
778@end itemize
779
780@kindex -n
781@cindex read-only text
782@cindex NMAGIC
783@kindex --nmagic
784@item -n
785@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
786Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
787libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
788mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
789
790@kindex -N
791@kindex --omagic
792@cindex read/write from cmd line
793@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 794@item -N
252b5132
RH
795@itemx --omagic
796Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
797not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
798libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
799mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
800is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
801specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
802
803@kindex --no-omagic
804@cindex OMAGIC
805@item --no-omagic
806This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
807sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
808be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
809shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
810
811@kindex -o @var{output}
812@kindex --output=@var{output}
813@cindex naming the output file
814@item -o @var{output}
815@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 816Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
817option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
818script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
819
820@kindex -O @var{level}
821@cindex generating optimized output
822@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 823If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 824the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
825should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
826option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
827the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
828no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
829of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 830
26278bb8
UD
831@kindex --push-state
832@cindex push state governing input file handling
833@item --push-state
834The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
835flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
836restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
837
838The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
839@option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
840@option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
841@option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
842@option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
843@option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
844
845One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
846used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
847listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
848something as follows:
849
850@smallexample
851-Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
852@end smallexample
853
854@kindex --pop-state
855@cindex pop state governing input file handling
856Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
857flags governing input file handling.
858
a712da20
NC
859@kindex -q
860@kindex --emit-relocs
861@cindex retain relocations in final executable
862@item -q
863@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 864Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
865Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
866order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
867in larger executables.
868
dbab7a7b
NC
869This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
870
4f471f39
RS
871@kindex --force-dynamic
872@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
873@item --force-dynamic
874Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
875to VxWorks targets.
876
252b5132
RH
877@cindex partial link
878@cindex relocatable output
879@kindex -r
1049f94e 880@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 881@item -r
1049f94e 882@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 883Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 884turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
885linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
886magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
887@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 888@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
889If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
890linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
891constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
892
62bf86b4
HPN
893When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
894partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
895relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
896example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
897with input files in other formats at all.
898
252b5132
RH
899This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
900
901@kindex -R @var{file}
902@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
903@cindex symbol-only input
904@item -R @var{filename}
905@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
906Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
907relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
908to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
909programs. You may use this option more than once.
910
ff5dcc92 911For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 912followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 913the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
914
915@kindex -s
916@kindex --strip-all
917@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 918@item -s
252b5132
RH
919@itemx --strip-all
920Omit all symbol information from the output file.
921
922@kindex -S
923@kindex --strip-debug
924@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 925@item -S
252b5132
RH
926@itemx --strip-debug
927Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
928
929@kindex -t
930@kindex --trace
931@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 932@item -t
252b5132 933@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 934Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
935
936@kindex -T @var{script}
937@kindex --script=@var{script}
938@cindex script files
939@item -T @var{scriptfile}
940@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
941Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 942@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 943@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
944output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
945the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
946specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
947options accumulate.
252b5132 948
14be8564
L
949@kindex -dT @var{script}
950@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
951@cindex script files
952@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
953@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
954Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
955
956This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
957processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
958command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
959@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
960behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
961command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
962the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
963@samp{gcc}).
964
252b5132
RH
965@kindex -u @var{symbol}
966@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
967@cindex undefined symbol
968@item -u @var{symbol}
969@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
970Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
971symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
972modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
973different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
974option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
975
976@kindex -Ur
977@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 978@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
979For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
980@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 981turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
982@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
983It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
984with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
985be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
986@samp{-r} for the others.
987
577a0623
AM
988@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
989@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
990Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
991@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
992missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
993specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
994multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
995input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
996in a linker script.
a854a4a7 997
252b5132
RH
998@kindex -v
999@kindex -V
1000@kindex --version
1001@cindex version
1002@item -v
1003@itemx --version
1004@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 1005Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
1006lists the supported emulations.
1007
1008@kindex -x
1009@kindex --discard-all
1010@cindex deleting local symbols
1011@item -x
1012@itemx --discard-all
1013Delete all local symbols.
1014
1015@kindex -X
1016@kindex --discard-locals
1017@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 1018@item -X
252b5132 1019@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
1020Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1021system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1022or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
1023
1024@kindex -y @var{symbol}
1025@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1026@cindex symbol tracing
1027@item -y @var{symbol}
1028@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1029Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1030option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1031to prepend an underscore.
1032
1033This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1034don't know where the reference is coming from.
1035
1036@kindex -Y @var{path}
1037@item -Y @var{path}
1038Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1039for Solaris compatibility.
1040
1041@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1042@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1043The recognized keywords are:
1044@table @samp
1045
1046@item combreloc
1047Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1048lookup caching possible.
1049
1050@item defs
560e09e9 1051Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 1052shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 1053
6aa29e7b
JJ
1054@item execstack
1055Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1056
b039ef04
L
1057@item global
1058This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1059the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1060of subsequently loaded libraries.
1061
cd6d6c15
NC
1062@item initfirst
1063This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1064It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1065before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1066the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1067the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1068objects.
1069
1070@item interpose
1071Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1072but the primary executable.
1073
5fa222e4
AM
1074@item lazy
1075When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1076dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1077the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1078Lazy binding is the default.
1079
cd6d6c15
NC
1080@item loadfltr
1081Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1082runtime.
1083
1084@item muldefs
1085Allows multiple definitions.
1086
1087@item nocombreloc
1088Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1089
1090@item nocopyreloc
daf220f0
AM
1091Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1092defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
cd6d6c15
NC
1093
1094@item nodefaultlib
1095Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1096ignore any default library search paths.
1097
1098@item nodelete
1099Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1100
1101@item nodlopen
1102Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1103
1104@item nodump
1105Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1106
6aa29e7b
JJ
1107@item noexecstack
1108Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1109
8dfef1bd
L
1110@item text
1111Treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1112
1113@item notext
1114Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1115
1116@item textoff
1117Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1118
6aa29e7b
JJ
1119@item norelro
1120Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1121
cd6d6c15
NC
1122@item now
1123When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1124dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1125when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1126deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1127first called.
1128
1129@item origin
1130Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1131
6aa29e7b
JJ
1132@item relro
1133Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1134
24718e3b
L
1135@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1136Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1137
1138@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1139Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1140
04c3a755
NS
1141@item stack-size=@var{value}
1142Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1143Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1144@code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1145
d258b828
IZ
1146@item bndplt
1147Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1148
889c2a67
L
1149@item noextern-protected-data
1150Don't treat protected data symbol as external when building shared
1151library. This option overrides linker backend default. It can be used
1152to workaround incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1153generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
1154module aren't visibile to the resulting shared library. Supported for
1155i386 and x86-64.
1156
cd6d6c15
NC
1157@end table
1158
ece2d90e 1159Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1160
1161@kindex -(
1162@cindex groups of archives
1163@item -( @var{archives} -)
1164@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1165The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1166either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1167
1168The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1169references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1170the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1171archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1172object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1173would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1174they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1175resolved.
1176
1177Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1178it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1179more archives.
1180
69da35b5
NC
1181@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1182@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1183@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1184@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1185Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1186recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1187and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1188the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1189behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1190so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1191restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1192
4a43e768
AM
1193@kindex --as-needed
1194@kindex --no-as-needed
1195@item --as-needed
1196@itemx --no-as-needed
1197This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1198on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1199the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1200on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31 1201needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
ffa9430d
AM
1202emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1203non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1240be6b
AM
1204the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1205non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
ffa9430d
AM
1206Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1207the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1208needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1209from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
4a43e768 1210
e56f61be
L
1211@kindex --add-needed
1212@kindex --no-add-needed
1213@item --add-needed
1214@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1215These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1216their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1217options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1218and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1219
252b5132
RH
1220@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1221@item -assert @var{keyword}
1222This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1223
1224@kindex -Bdynamic
1225@kindex -dy
1226@kindex -call_shared
1227@item -Bdynamic
1228@itemx -dy
1229@itemx -call_shared
1230Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1231for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1232default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1233for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1234multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1235@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1236
a1ab1d2a
UD
1237@kindex -Bgroup
1238@item -Bgroup
1239Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1240section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1241object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1242@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1243only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1244
252b5132
RH
1245@kindex -Bstatic
1246@kindex -dn
1247@kindex -non_shared
1248@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1249@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1250@itemx -dn
1251@itemx -non_shared
1252@itemx -static
1253Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1254platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1255variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1256may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1257library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1258option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1259option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1260shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1261references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1262libraries.
252b5132
RH
1263
1264@kindex -Bsymbolic
1265@item -Bsymbolic
1266When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1267definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1268for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1269within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1270platforms which support shared libraries.
1271
40b36307
L
1272@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1273@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1274When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1275symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
40b36307
L
1276This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1277libraries.
1278
55255dae
L
1279@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1280@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1281Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1282typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1283global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1284within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1285to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1286in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1287which support shared libraries.
1288
1289The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1290scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1291
40b36307
L
1292@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1293@item --dynamic-list-data
1294Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1295
1296@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1297@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1298Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1299is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1300
0b8a70d9
L
1301@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1302@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1303Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1304
252b5132
RH
1305@kindex --check-sections
1306@kindex --no-check-sections
1307@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1308@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1309Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1310been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1311perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1312suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1313allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1314restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1315Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1316force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1317option.
252b5132 1318
ddbb8a31
NC
1319@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1320@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1321@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1322@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
9d5777a3 1323This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
ddbb8a31 1324by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
08efffb8 1325command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
ddbb8a31 1326output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
08efffb8 1327input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
ddbb8a31 1328specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
08efffb8
MM
1329follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1330behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
ddbb8a31
NC
1331
1332This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
08efffb8
MM
1333libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1334mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1335their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1336required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1337the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1338dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
ddbb8a31
NC
1339symbols.
1340
252b5132
RH
1341@cindex cross reference table
1342@kindex --cref
1343@item --cref
1344Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1345generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1346Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1347
1348The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1349easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1350sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1351symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
049c1c8e
NC
1352definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1353where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1354symbol are listed.
252b5132 1355
4818e05f
AM
1356@cindex common allocation
1357@kindex --no-define-common
1358@item --no-define-common
1359This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1360The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1361@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1362
1363The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1364the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1365of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1366forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1367Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1368from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1369This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1370and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1371duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1372paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1373
252b5132 1374@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1375@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1376@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1377Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1378address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1379times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1380limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1381context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1382symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1383constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
66bc8739
AM
1384using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1385@emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1386equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
252b5132
RH
1387
1388@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1389@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1390@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1391@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1392@itemx --no-demangle
1393These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1394and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1395present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1396underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1397mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1398different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1399to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1400demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1401is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1402
1403@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1404@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1405@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1406@item -I@var{file}
1407@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1408Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1409generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1410linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1411doing.
1412
7ce691ae 1413@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1414@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1415@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1416@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1417Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1418with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1419
252b5132
RH
1420@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1421@item --force-exe-suffix
1422Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1423
1424If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1425@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1426the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1427option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1428Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1429it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1430
1431@kindex --gc-sections
1432@kindex --no-gc-sections
1433@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1434@item --gc-sections
1435@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1436Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1437targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761 1438performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
0f088b2a
KT
1439@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1440collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1441implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
252b5132 1442
d5465ba2
AM
1443@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1444examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1445symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1446command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1447referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1448libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1449referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1450the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1451relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1452
ac69cbc6 1453This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
9d5777a3 1454@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
ac69cbc6
TG
1455specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1456a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1457
c17d87de
NC
1458@kindex --print-gc-sections
1459@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1460@cindex garbage collection
1461@item --print-gc-sections
1462@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1463List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1464printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1465collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1466default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1467be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1468line.
1469
30824704
RM
1470@kindex --print-output-format
1471@cindex output format
1472@item --print-output-format
1473Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1474other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1475in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1476
3604cb1f
TG
1477@kindex --print-memory-usage
1478@cindex memory usage
1479@item --print-memory-usage
1480Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1481the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1482quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1483headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1484parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1485
1486@smallexample
1487Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1488 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1489 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1490@end smallexample
1491
252b5132
RH
1492@cindex help
1493@cindex usage
1494@kindex --help
1495@item --help
1496Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1497
ea20a7da
CC
1498@kindex --target-help
1499@item --target-help
1500Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1501
2509a395
SL
1502@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1503@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1504Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1505@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1506
1507@cindex memory usage
1508@kindex --no-keep-memory
1509@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1510@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1511symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1512instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1513necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1514while linking a large executable.
1515
1516@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1517@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1518@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1519@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1520Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1521is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1522The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1523behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1524libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1525
aa713662
L
1526@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1527@kindex -z muldefs
1528@item --allow-multiple-definition
1529@itemx -z muldefs
1530Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1531report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1532first definition will be used.
1533
b79e8c78 1534@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1535@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1536@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1537@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1538Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1539This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1540determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1541shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1542how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1543
903249d7
NC
1544The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1545referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1546an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1547a shared library.
1548
1549The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1550libraries specified at link time are that:
1551
1552@itemize @bullet
1553@item
1554A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1555that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1556resolvable at load time.
1557@item
1558There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1559symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1560
1561The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1562select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1563architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1564appropriate memset function.
1565@end itemize
b79e8c78 1566
31941635
L
1567@kindex --no-undefined-version
1568@item --no-undefined-version
1569Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1570it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1571will be issued instead.
1572
3e3b46e5
PB
1573@kindex --default-symver
1574@item --default-symver
1575Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1576exported symbols.
1577
1578@kindex --default-imported-symver
1579@item --default-imported-symver
1580Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1581imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1582
252b5132
RH
1583@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1584@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1585Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1586files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1587been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1588This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1589errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1590have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1591inappropriate.
1592
fe7929ce
AM
1593@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1594@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1595Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1596library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1597
252b5132
RH
1598@kindex --no-whole-archive
1599@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1600Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1601archive files.
1602
1603@cindex output file after errors
1604@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1605@item --noinhibit-exec
1606Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1607Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1608errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1609when it issues any error whatsoever.
1610
0a9c1c8e
CD
1611@kindex -nostdlib
1612@item -nostdlib
1613Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1614command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1615(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1616
252b5132 1617@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1618@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1619@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1620@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1621file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1622@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1623object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1624object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1625should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1626usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1627name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1628list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1629command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1630this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1631@end ifclear
1632
36af4a4e
JJ
1633@kindex -pie
1634@kindex --pic-executable
1635@item -pie
1636@itemx --pic-executable
1637@cindex position independent executables
1638Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1639ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1640libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1641address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1642normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1643defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1644
252b5132
RH
1645@kindex -qmagic
1646@item -qmagic
1647This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1648
1649@kindex -Qy
1650@item -Qy
1651This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1652
1653@kindex --relax
1654@cindex synthesizing linker
1655@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1656@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1657@item --relax
28d5f677 1658@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1659An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1660@ifset GENERIC
1661This option is only supported on a few targets.
1662@end ifset
1663@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1664@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1665@end ifset
1666@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1667@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1668@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1669@ifset XTENSA
1670@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1671@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1672@ifset M68HC11
1673@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1674@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
1675@ifset NIOSII
1676@xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1677@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1678@ifset POWERPC
1679@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1680@end ifset
252b5132 1681
28d5f677
NC
1682On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1683global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1684addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1685synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
11e7fd74 1686instructions, and combining constant values.
252b5132
RH
1687
1688On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1689debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1690@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1691This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1692family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1693@end ifset
1694
1695@ifset GENERIC
1696On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1697but ignored.
1698@end ifset
1699
28d5f677
NC
1700On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1701@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1702
252b5132
RH
1703@cindex retaining specified symbols
1704@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1705@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1706@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1707@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1708Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1709discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1710symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1711@ifset GENERIC
1712(such as VxWorks)
1713@end ifset
1714where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1715run-time memory.
1716
1717@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1718or symbols needed for relocations.
1719
1720You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1721line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1722
1723@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1724@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1725@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1726@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1727Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1728linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1729arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1730them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1731also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1732objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1733@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1734ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1735@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1736
ff5dcc92 1737The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
252b5132 1738SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1739@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1740runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1741options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1742gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1743file systems.
252b5132 1744
ff5dcc92 1745For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1746followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1747the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1748@end ifset
1749
1750@ifset GENERIC
1751@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1752@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1753@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1754When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1755happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1756of the input files.
1757
1758When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1759non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1760shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1761explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1762specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1763@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1764either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1765appearing multiple times.
1766
28c309a2
NC
1767This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1768that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1769is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1770runtime linker would do.
1771
252b5132 1772The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1773libraries:
252b5132
RH
1774@enumerate
1775@item
ff5dcc92 1776Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1777@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1778Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1779between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1780specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1781used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1782at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1783by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1784the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1785@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1786On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1787@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1788environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1789@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1790On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1791directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1792@item
a1b8d843 1793For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
e2a83dd0 1794variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1795@item
ec4eb78a
L
1796For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1797@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1798libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1799@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1800@item
252b5132
RH
1801The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1802@item
1803For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1804exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1805@end enumerate
1806
1807If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1808warning and continue with the link.
1809@end ifset
1810
1811@kindex -shared
1812@kindex -Bshareable
1813@item -shared
1814@itemx -Bshareable
1815@cindex shared libraries
1816Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1817and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1818shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1819undefined symbols in the link.
1820
252b5132 1821@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
1822@item --sort-common
1823@itemx --sort-common=ascending
1824@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
1825This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1826ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1827sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1828eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1829between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1830specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 1831
2509a395
SL
1832@kindex --sort-section=name
1833@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
1834This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1835patterns in the linker script.
1836
2509a395
SL
1837@kindex --sort-section=alignment
1838@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
1839This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1840patterns in the linker script.
1841
252b5132 1842@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 1843@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 1844Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
1845each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1846size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
1847
1848@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 1849@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 1850Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 1851output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 1852This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
1853certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1854cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1855that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1856support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1857input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1858more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 1859many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
1860
1861@kindex --stats
1862@item --stats
1863Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1864as execution time and memory usage.
1865
2509a395 1866@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
1867@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1868Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1869configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1870that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1871
252b5132
RH
1872@kindex --traditional-format
1873@cindex traditional format
1874@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
1875For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1876the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
1877use the traditional format instead.
1878
1879@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 1880For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
1881symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1882full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1883@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 1884trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
1885combine duplicate entries.
1886
2509a395
SL
1887@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1888@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
1889Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1890address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1891times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1892line.
1893@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1894for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1895@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1896should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1897sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1898
2509a395
SL
1899@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1900@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1901@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 1902@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
1903@item -Tbss=@var{org}
1904@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1905@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1906Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 1907@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 1908
2509a395
SL
1909@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1910@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5 1911@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2b8c06a3
L
1912When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
1913byte of the text segment.
258795f5 1914
9d5777a3
RM
1915@kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1916@item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1917@cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
1918When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
1919the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
1920text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
1921
0d705e9f
AM
1922@kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1923@item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1924@cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
1925When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
1926model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
1927
560e09e9
NC
1928@kindex --unresolved-symbols
1929@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1930Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1931values for @samp{method}:
1932
1933@table @samp
1934@item ignore-all
da8bce14 1935Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
1936
1937@item report-all
da8bce14 1938Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
1939
1940@item ignore-in-object-files
1941Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1942ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1943
1944@item ignore-in-shared-libs
1945Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1946ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1947when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1948libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1949command line.
1950@end table
1951
1952The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1953by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1954
1955Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1956unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1957can change this to a warning.
1958
1715a13c
L
1959@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1960@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 1961@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 1962@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 1963Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 1964supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
1965the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
1966argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
1967
1968@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1969@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 1970@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
1971Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1972used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 1973about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
1974is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
1975see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
1976use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
1977symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
1978@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 1979
7ce691ae 1980@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
1981@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1982@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1983@item --warn-common
1984Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
11e7fd74 1985a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
252b5132
RH
1986but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
1987you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
11e7fd74 1988Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
1989warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1990
1991There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1992
1993@table @samp
1994@item int i = 1;
1995A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1996file.
1997
1998@item extern int i;
1999An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2000There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2001variable somewhere.
2002
2003@item int i;
2004A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2005variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2006The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2007single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2008size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2009a definition of the same variable.
2010@end table
2011
2012The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2013Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2014just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2015encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2016a common symbol.
2017
2018@enumerate
2019@item
2020Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2021definition for the symbol.
2022@smallexample
2023@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2024 overridden by definition
2025@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2026@end smallexample
2027
2028@item
2029Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2030the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2031except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2032@smallexample
2033@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2034 overriding common
2035@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2036@end smallexample
2037
2038@item
2039Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2040@smallexample
2041@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2042 of `@var{symbol}'
2043@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2044@end smallexample
2045
2046@item
2047Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2048@smallexample
2049@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2050 overridden by larger common
2051@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2052@end smallexample
2053
2054@item
2055Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2056the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2057encountered in a different order.
2058@smallexample
2059@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2060 overriding smaller common
2061@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2062@end smallexample
2063@end enumerate
2064
2065@kindex --warn-constructors
2066@item --warn-constructors
2067Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2068object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2069detect the use of global constructors.
2070
2071@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2072@item --warn-multiple-gp
2073Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2074This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2075Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2076section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2077of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2078base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2079base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2080bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2081large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2082values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2083option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2084
2085@kindex --warn-once
2086@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2087@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2088@item --warn-once
2089Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2090which refers to it.
2091
3ea60775
NC
2092@kindex --warn-orphan
2093@kindex --no-warn-orphan
2094@cindex warnings, on orphan sections
2095@cindex orphan sections, warnings on
2096@item --warn-orphan
2097The @option{--warn-orphan} option tells the linker to generate a
2098warning message whenever it has to place an orphan section into the
1f0d470a 2099output file. @xref{Orphan Sections}. The @option{--no-warn-orphan}
3ea60775
NC
2100option restores the default behaviour of just silently placing these
2101sections.
2102
252b5132
RH
2103@kindex --warn-section-align
2104@cindex warnings, on section alignment
2105@cindex section alignment, warnings on
2106@item --warn-section-align
2107Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2108alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2109The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2110is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2111the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2112
8fdd7217
NC
2113@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2114@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 2115Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2116
a0c402a5
L
2117@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2118@item --warn-alternate-em
2119Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2120
560e09e9
NC
2121@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2122@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2123If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2124@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2125This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2126
2127@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2128@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2129This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2130it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2131
252b5132
RH
2132@kindex --whole-archive
2133@cindex including an entire archive
2134@item --whole-archive
2135For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2136@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2137in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2138files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2139library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2140library. This option may be used more than once.
2141
7ec229ce 2142Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2143about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2144Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2145list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2146your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2147
2509a395
SL
2148@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2149@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2150Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2151@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2152undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2153@var{symbol}.
2154
2155This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2156wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2157wishes to call the system function, it should call
2158@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2159
2160Here is a trivial example:
2161
2162@smallexample
2163void *
cc2f008e 2164__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2165@{
cc2f008e 2166 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2167 return __real_malloc (c);
2168@}
2169@end smallexample
2170
ff5dcc92 2171If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2172all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2173instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2174call the real @code{malloc} function.
2175
2176You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2177links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2178you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2179file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2180call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2181
6aa29e7b
JJ
2182@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2183@item --eh-frame-hdr
2184Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2185@code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2186
e41b3a13
JJ
2187@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2188@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2189Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2190generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2191if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2192
6c1439be
L
2193@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2194@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2195@item --enable-new-dtags
2196@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2197This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2198systems may not understand them. If you specify
b1b00fcc
MF
2199@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2200and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
ff5dcc92 2201If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2202created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2203those options are only available for ELF systems.
2204
2d643429 2205@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2206@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2207Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2208close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2209time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2210increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2211value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2212
fdc90cb4
JJ
2213@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2214@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2215Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2216@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2217new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2218the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2219hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2220
0ce398f1
L
2221@kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2222@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2223@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2224@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2225@item --compress-debug-sections=none
2226@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2227@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2228@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2229On ELF platforms , these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2230compressed using zlib. @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't
19a7fe52
L
2231compress DWARF debug sections.
2232@option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses DWARF debug
0ce398f1 2233sections and rename debug section names to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
19a7fe52
L
2234instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib}
2235and @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2236compress DWARF debug sections with SHF_COMPRESSED from the ELF ABI.
0ce398f1 2237
35835446
JR
2238@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2239@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2240This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2241linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2242for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2243about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2244
4f9c04f7 2245Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 22461021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2247run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2248has been used.
2249
2250The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2251enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2252
c0065db7
RM
2253@kindex --build-id
2254@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2255@item --build-id
2256@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
61e2488c
JT
2257Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
2258or a @code{.build-id} COFF section. The contents of the note are
2259unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2260@code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2261@sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2262@code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2263the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2264string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2265@code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2266is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
24382dca
RM
2267
2268The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2269that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2270unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2271to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2272file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2273string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2274
2275Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2276@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2277@end table
2278
0285c67d
NC
2279@c man end
2280
36f63dca 2281@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2282
0285c67d
NC
2283@c man begin OPTIONS
2284
ff5dcc92 2285The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2286the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2287normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2288use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2289@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2290like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2291symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2292object file).
2293
2294In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2295support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2296PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2297values by either a space or an equals sign.
2298
ff5dcc92 2299@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2300
2301@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2302@item --add-stdcall-alias
2303If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2304as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2305[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2306
2307@kindex --base-file
2308@item --base-file @var{file}
2309Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2310addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2311@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2312[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2313
2314@kindex --dll
2315@item --dll
2316Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2317@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2318file.
bb10df36 2319[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2320
88183869
DK
2321@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2322@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2323@item --enable-long-section-names
2324@itemx --disable-long-section-names
2325The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that permits
2326the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2327for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2328fully-linked executable images do not carry the Coff string table required
2329to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2330allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2331disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2332generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2333as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
9d5777a3
RM
2334with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2335GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
3efd345c
DK
2336information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2337option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2338section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2339when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2340image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2341[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2342
252b5132
RH
2343@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2344@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2345@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2346@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2347If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2348do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2349only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2350resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2351undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2352@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2353to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2354warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2355import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2356to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2357feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2358@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2359mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2360[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2361
522f09cd
KT
2362@kindex --leading-underscore
2363@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2364@item --leading-underscore
2365@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2366For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2367in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2368disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2369
252b5132
RH
2370@cindex DLLs, creating
2371@kindex --export-all-symbols
2372@item --export-all-symbols
2373If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2374be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2375otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2376explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2377attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2378option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2379@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2380@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2381exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2382re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2383such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2384@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2385@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2386Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2387not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2388extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2389(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2390These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2391@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2392@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2393@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2394@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2395[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2396
2397@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2398@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2399Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2400exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2401[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2402
2927aaca
NC
2403@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2404@item --exclude-all-symbols
2405Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2406[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2407
252b5132
RH
2408@kindex --file-alignment
2409@item --file-alignment
2410Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2411file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2412512.
bb10df36 2413[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2414
2415@cindex heap size
2416@kindex --heap
2417@item --heap @var{reserve}
2418@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2419Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2420to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2421committed.
bb10df36 2422[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2423
2424@cindex image base
2425@kindex --image-base
2426@item --image-base @var{value}
2427Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2428the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2429is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2430your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2431other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2432for dlls.
bb10df36 2433[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2434
2435@kindex --kill-at
2436@item --kill-at
2437If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2438symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2439[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2440
26d2d8a2
BF
2441@kindex --large-address-aware
2442@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2443If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2444header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2445greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2446or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2447section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2448[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2449
f69a2f97
NC
2450@kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2451@item --disable-large-address-aware
2452Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2453This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2454driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2455addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2456[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2457
252b5132
RH
2458@kindex --major-image-version
2459@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2460Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2461[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2462
2463@kindex --major-os-version
2464@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2465Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2466[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2467
2468@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2469@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2470Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2471[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2472
2473@kindex --minor-image-version
2474@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2475Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2476[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2477
2478@kindex --minor-os-version
2479@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2480Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2481[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2482
2483@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2484@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2485Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2486[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2487
2488@cindex DEF files, creating
2489@cindex DLLs, creating
2490@kindex --output-def
2491@item --output-def @var{file}
2492The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2493file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2494(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2495library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2496automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2497[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2498
b044cda1
CW
2499@cindex DLLs, creating
2500@kindex --out-implib
2501@item --out-implib @var{file}
2502The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2503import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2504import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
560e09e9 2505may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
b044cda1
CW
2506makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2507creation step.
bb10df36 2508[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2509
2510@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2511@item --enable-auto-image-base
d0e6d77b
CF
2512@itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2513Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2514@var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2515By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2516for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2517execution are avoided.
bb10df36 2518[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2519
2520@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2521@item --disable-auto-image-base
2522Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2523user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2524default.
bb10df36 2525[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2526
2527@cindex DLLs, linking to
2528@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2529@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2530When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2531search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2532@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2533between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2534uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2535@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2536[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2537
2538@kindex --enable-auto-import
2539@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2540Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2541DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2542building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2543'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2544to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2545specification published by Microsoft.
2546
e2a83dd0
NC
2547Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2548data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2549placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2550around a problem with consts that is described here:
2551http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2552
4d8907ac
DS
2553Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2554see this message:
0d888aac 2555
ece2d90e 2556"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2557documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2558
ece2d90e
NC
2559This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2560ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2561allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2562fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2563constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2564multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2565this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2566of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2567the warning, and exit.
2568
2569There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2570data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2571
2fa9fc65
NC
2572One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2573of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2574this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2575
c0065db7
RM
2576A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2577that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2578there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2579a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2580
2581@example
2582extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2583extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2584 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2585@end example
2586
2587or
2588
2589@example
2590extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2591extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2592 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2593@end example
2594
c0065db7 2595For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2596is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2597
2598@example
2599extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2600extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2601 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2602@end example
2603
c406afaf
NC
2604or
2605
2606@example
2607extern long long extern_ll;
2608extern_ll -->
2609 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2610@end example
2611
2fa9fc65 2612A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2613'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
11e7fd74 2614@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
0d888aac 2615requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2616building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2617merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2618between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2619constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2620
2621Original:
2622@example
2623--foo.h
2624extern int arr[];
2625--foo.c
2626#include "foo.h"
2627void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2628 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2629@}
2630@end example
2631
2632Solution 1:
2633@example
2634--foo.h
2635extern int arr[];
2636--foo.c
2637#include "foo.h"
2638void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2639 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2640 volatile int *parr = arr;
2641 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2642@}
2643@end example
2644
2645Solution 2:
2646@example
2647--foo.h
2648/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2649#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2650 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2651#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2652#else
2653#define FOO_IMPORT
2654#endif
2655extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2656--foo.c
2657#include "foo.h"
2658void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2659 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2660@}
2661@end example
2662
c0065db7 2663A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2664library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2665for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2666functions).
bb10df36 2667[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2668
2669@kindex --disable-auto-import
2670@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2671Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2672@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2673[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2674
2fa9fc65
NC
2675@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2676@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2677If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2678that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2679a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2680environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2681[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2682
2683@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2684@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2685Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
676ee43b 2686DLLs.
bb10df36 2687[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2688
b044cda1
CW
2689@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2690@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2691Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2692[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2693
252b5132
RH
2694@kindex --section-alignment
2695@item --section-alignment
2696Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2697addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2698[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2699
2700@cindex stack size
2701@kindex --stack
2702@item --stack @var{reserve}
2703@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2704Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2705to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2706committed.
bb10df36 2707[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2708
2709@kindex --subsystem
2710@item --subsystem @var{which}
2711@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2712@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2713Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2714legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2715@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2716the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2717@var{which}.
bb10df36 2718[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2719
2f563b51
DK
2720The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2721of the PE file header:
2722[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2723
2d5c3743
NC
2724@kindex --high-entropy-va
2725@item --high-entropy-va
2726Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2727(ASLR).
2728
2f563b51
DK
2729@kindex --dynamicbase
2730@item --dynamicbase
2731The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2732randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2733Vista for i386 PE targets.
2734
2735@kindex --forceinteg
2736@item --forceinteg
2737Code integrity checks are enforced.
2738
2739@kindex --nxcompat
2740@item --nxcompat
2741The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2742This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2743
2744@kindex --no-isolation
2745@item --no-isolation
2746Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2747
2748@kindex --no-seh
2749@item --no-seh
2750The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2751this image.
2752
2753@kindex --no-bind
2754@item --no-bind
2755Do not bind this image.
2756
2757@kindex --wdmdriver
2758@item --wdmdriver
2759The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
9d5777a3 2760
2f563b51
DK
2761@kindex --tsaware
2762@item --tsaware
2763The image is Terminal Server aware.
2764
0cb112f7
CF
2765@kindex --insert-timestamp
2766@item --insert-timestamp
eeb14e5a
LZ
2767@itemx --no-insert-timestamp
2768Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
2769as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
2770other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
2771will result in slightly different images being produced each tiem the
2772same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
2773can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
2774that binaries produced from indentical sources will compare
2775identically.
252b5132
RH
2776@end table
2777
0285c67d
NC
2778@c man end
2779
ac145307
BS
2780@ifset C6X
2781@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2782
2783@c man begin OPTIONS
2784
2785The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2786libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2787all executables use an index of 0.
2788
2789@table @gcctabopt
2790
2791@kindex --dsbt-size
2792@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
2793This option sets the number of entires in the DSBT of the current executable
2794or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2795entries.
2796
2797@kindex --dsbt-index
2798@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2799This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2800to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2801executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2802@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2803
fbd9ad90
PB
2804@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2805The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2806exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2807
ac145307
BS
2808@end table
2809
2810@c man end
2811@end ifset
2812
93fd0973
SC
2813@ifset M68HC11
2814@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2815
2816@c man begin OPTIONS
2817
2818The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2819memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2820
2821@table @gcctabopt
2822
2823@kindex --no-trampoline
2824@item --no-trampoline
2825This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2826is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2827instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2828
2829@kindex --bank-window
2830@item --bank-window @var{name}
2831This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2832the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2833The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2834paging and addresses within the memory window.
2835
2836@end table
2837
2838@c man end
2839@end ifset
2840
7fb9f789
NC
2841@ifset M68K
2842@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2843
2844@c man begin OPTIONS
2845
2846The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2847when linking for 68K targets.
2848
2849@table @gcctabopt
2850
2851@kindex --got
2852@item --got=@var{type}
2853This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2854@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2855@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2856Info entry for @file{ld}.
2857
2858@end table
2859
2860@c man end
2861@end ifset
2862
833794fc
MR
2863@ifset MIPS
2864@subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
2865
2866@c man begin OPTIONS
2867
2868The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
2869generation when linking for MIPS targets.
2870
2871@table @gcctabopt
2872
2873@kindex --insn32
2874@item --insn32
2875@kindex --no-insn32
2876@itemx --no-insn32
2877These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
2878generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
2879or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
288032-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
2881used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
2882possible.
2883
2884@end table
2885
2886@c man end
2887@end ifset
2888
252b5132
RH
2889@ifset UsesEnvVars
2890@node Environment
2891@section Environment Variables
2892
0285c67d
NC
2893@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2894
560e09e9 2895You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
2896@ifclear SingleFormat
2897@code{GNUTARGET},
2898@end ifclear
2899@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 2900
36f63dca 2901@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
2902@kindex GNUTARGET
2903@cindex default input format
2904@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2905use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2906of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 2907@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
2908of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2909attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2910this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2911there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2912object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2913BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2914in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 2915@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
2916
2917@kindex LDEMULATION
2918@cindex default emulation
2919@cindex emulation, default
2920@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2921@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2922behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2923available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2924the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2925variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2926linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
2927
2928@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2929@cindex demangling, default
2930Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2931@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2932default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2933a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2934may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2935options.
2936
0285c67d
NC
2937@c man end
2938@end ifset
2939
252b5132
RH
2940@node Scripts
2941@chapter Linker Scripts
2942
2943@cindex scripts
2944@cindex linker scripts
2945@cindex command files
2946Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2947written in the linker command language.
2948
2949The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2950the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2951the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2952more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2953direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2954described below.
2955
2956The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2957yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2958linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2959to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2960such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2961
2962You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2963line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2964default linker script.
2965
2966You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2967to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2968Linker Scripts}.
2969
2970@menu
2971* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2972* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2973* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2974* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2975* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2976* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2977* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2978* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2979* VERSION:: VERSION Command
2980* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2981* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2982@end menu
2983
2984@node Basic Script Concepts
2985@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2986@cindex linker script concepts
2987We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2988describe the linker script language.
2989
2990The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
2991file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2992@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2993The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2994purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
2995among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
2996section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2997in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2998
2999Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3000also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
56dd11f0 3001contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
252b5132
RH
3002the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3003A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3004area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3005loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3006which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3007of debugging information.
3008
3009Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3010first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3011the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3012@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3013section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3014same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3015is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3016(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3017based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3018RAM address would be the VMA.
3019
3020You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3021program with the @samp{-h} option.
3022
3023Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3024@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3025has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3026information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3027will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3028static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3029referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3030
3031You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3032program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3033option.
3034
3035@node Script Format
3036@section Linker Script Format
3037@cindex linker script format
3038Linker scripts are text files.
3039
3040You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3041either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3042symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3043generally ignored.
3044
3045Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3046If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3047otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3048double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3049file name.
3050
3051You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3052@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3053to whitespace.
3054
3055@node Simple Example
3056@section Simple Linker Script Example
3057@cindex linker script example
3058@cindex example of linker script
3059Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3060
3061The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3062@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3063memory layout of the output file.
3064
3065The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3066describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3067code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3068@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3069Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3070your input files.
3071
3072For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
30730x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3074linker script which will do that:
3075@smallexample
3076SECTIONS
3077@{
3078 . = 0x10000;
3079 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3080 . = 0x8000000;
3081 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3082 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3083@}
3084@end smallexample
3085
3086You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3087followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3088descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3089
252b5132
RH
3090The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3091sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3092counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3093other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3094current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3095incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3096@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3097
3098The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3099required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3100after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3101which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3102wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3103means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3104
3105Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3106@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3107@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3108
3109The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3110the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3111at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3112output section, the value of the location counter will be
3113@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3114effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 3115immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
3116
3117The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3118alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3119example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3120sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3121may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3122sections.
3123
3124That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3125
3126@node Simple Commands
3127@section Simple Linker Script Commands
3128@cindex linker script simple commands
3129In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3130
3131@menu
3132* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3133* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3134@ifclear SingleFormat
3135* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3136@end ifclear
3137
4a93e180 3138* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
3139* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3140@end menu
3141
3142@node Entry Point
36f63dca 3143@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
3144@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3145@cindex start of execution
3146@cindex first instruction
3147@cindex entry point
3148The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3149point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3150entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3151@smallexample
3152ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3153@end smallexample
3154
3155There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3156entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3157stopping when one of them succeeds:
3158@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 3159@item
252b5132 3160the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 3161@item
252b5132 3162the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 3163@item
3ab904c4
NC
3164the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3165targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3166check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 3167@item
252b5132 3168the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 3169@item
252b5132
RH
3170The address @code{0}.
3171@end itemize
3172
3173@node File Commands
36f63dca 3174@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
3175@cindex linker script file commands
3176Several linker script commands deal with files.
3177
3178@table @code
3179@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3180@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3181@cindex including a linker script
3182Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3183be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 3184with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
318510 levels deep.
3186
4006703d
NS
3187You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3188@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3189
252b5132
RH
3190@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3191@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3192@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3193@cindex input files in linker scripts
3194@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3195@cindex linker script input object files
3196The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3197in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3198
3199For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3200a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3201then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3202
3203In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3204script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3205
e3f2db7f
AO
3206In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3207with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3208located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3209for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3210open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
cad60a33
HPN
3211linker will search through the archive library search path.
3212The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3213as the first character in the filename path. See also the
e3f2db7f 3214description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 3215
ff5dcc92 3216If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
3217name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3218@samp{-l}.
3219
3220When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3221files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3222script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3223
3224@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3225@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3226@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3227@cindex grouping input files
3228The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3229files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3230new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3231in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3232
b717d30e
JJ
3233@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3234@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3235@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3236This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3237commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3238as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3239with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3240when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3241@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3242and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3243setting afterwards.
3244
252b5132
RH
3245@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3246@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3247@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3248The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3249@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3250@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3251Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3252precedence.
3253
3254You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3255output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3256
3257@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3258@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3259@cindex library search path in linker script
3260@cindex archive search path in linker script
3261@cindex search path in linker script
3262The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3263@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
3264@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3265on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3266are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3267the command line option are searched first.
3268
3269@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3270@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3271@cindex first input file
3272The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3273that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3274though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3275when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3276first file.
3277@end table
3278
3279@ifclear SingleFormat
3280@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3281@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3282A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3283
3284@table @code
3285@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3286@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3287@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3288@cindex output file format in linker script
3289The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3290output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3291exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
3292(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3293line option takes precedence.
3294
3295You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3296formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3297This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3298desired endianness.
3299
3300If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3301will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3302output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3303used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3304
3305For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3306command:
3307@smallexample
3308OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3309@end smallexample
3310This says that the default format for the output file is
3311@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3312option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3313format.
3314
3315@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3316@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3317@cindex input file format in linker script
3318The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3319files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3320This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3321(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3322is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3323command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3324@end table
3325@end ifclear
3326
4a93e180
NC
3327@node REGION_ALIAS
3328@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3329@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3330@cindex region alias
3331@cindex region names
3332
3333Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3334@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3335
3336@smallexample
3337REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3338@end smallexample
3339
3340The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3341memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3342to memory regions. An example follows.
3343
3344Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3345memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3346that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3347non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3348access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3349read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3350sections:
3351
3352@itemize @bullet
3353@item
3354@code{.text} program code;
3355@item
3356@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3357@item
3358@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3359@item
3360@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3361@end itemize
3362
3363The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3364part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3365output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3366systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3367@code{C}:
3368@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3369@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
9d5777a3 3370@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
4a93e180
NC
3371@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3372@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3373@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3374@end multitable
3375The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3376loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3377the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3378the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3379
3380The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3381includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3382memory layout:
3383@smallexample
3384INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3385
3386SECTIONS
3387 @{
3388 .text :
3389 @{
3390 *(.text)
3391 @} > REGION_TEXT
3392 .rodata :
3393 @{
3394 *(.rodata)
3395 rodata_end = .;
3396 @} > REGION_RODATA
3397 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3398 @{
3399 data_start = .;
3400 *(.data)
3401 @} > REGION_DATA
3402 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3403 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3404 .bss :
3405 @{
3406 *(.bss)
3407 @} > REGION_BSS
3408 @}
3409@end smallexample
3410
3411Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3412regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3413variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3414@table @code
3415@item A
3416Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3417@smallexample
3418MEMORY
3419 @{
3420 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3421 @}
3422
3423REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3424REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3425REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3426REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3427@end smallexample
3428@item B
3429Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3430into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3431@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3432@smallexample
3433MEMORY
3434 @{
3435 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3436 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3437 @}
3438
3439REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3440REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3441REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3442REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3443@end smallexample
3444@item C
3445Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3446@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3447initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3448system start into the @code{RAM}.
3449@smallexample
3450MEMORY
3451 @{
3452 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3453 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3454 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3455 @}
3456
3457REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3458REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3459REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3460REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3461@end smallexample
3462@end table
3463
3464It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3465@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3466necessary:
3467@smallexample
3468#include <string.h>
3469
3470extern char data_start [];
3471extern char data_size [];
3472extern char data_load_start [];
3473
3474void copy_data(void)
3475@{
3476 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3477 @{
3478 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3479 @}
3480@}
3481@end smallexample
3482
252b5132 3483@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3484@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3485There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3486
3487@table @code
3488@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3489@kindex ASSERT
3490@cindex assertion in linker script
3491Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3492with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3493
fd1c4238
NC
3494Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3495take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3496inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3497for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3498symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3499
3500@smallexample
3501 .stack :
3502 @{
3503 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3504 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3505 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3506 @}
3507@end smallexample
3508
3509will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3510PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3511can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3512
3513@smallexample
3514 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3515 .stack :
3516 @{
3517 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3518 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3519 @}
3520@end smallexample
3521
3522will work.
3523
252b5132
RH
3524@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3525@kindex EXTERN
3526@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3527Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3528symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3529modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3530each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3531command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3532
3533@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3534@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3535@cindex common allocation in linker script
3536This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3537to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3538output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3539
4818e05f
AM
3540@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3541@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3542@cindex common allocation in linker script
3543This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3544command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3545to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3546
53d25da6
AM
3547@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3548@kindex INSERT
3549@cindex insert user script into default script
3550This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3551augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3552inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3553@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3554default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3555sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3556linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3557insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3558linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3559default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3560of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3561to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3562is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3563
3564@smallexample
3565SECTIONS
3566@{
3567 OVERLAY :
3568 @{
3569 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3570 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3571 @}
3572@}
3573INSERT AFTER .text;
3574@end smallexample
3575
252b5132
RH
3576@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3577@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3578@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3579This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3580references among certain output sections.
3581
3582In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3583using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3584will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3585errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3586a function defined in the other section.
3587
3588The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3589@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3590an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3591@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3592names.
3593
3594@ifclear SingleFormat
3595@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3596@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3597@cindex machine architecture
3598@cindex architecture
3599Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3600of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3601architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3602the @samp{-f} option.
3603@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
3604
3605@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3606@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3607This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3608@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3609in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3610@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
3611@end table
3612
3613@node Assignments
3614@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3615@cindex assignment in scripts
3616@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3617@cindex variables, defining
3618You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3619the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3620
3621@menu
3622* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
eb8476a6 3623* HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
252b5132 3624* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3625* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3626* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3627@end menu
3628
3629@node Simple Assignments
3630@subsection Simple Assignments
3631
3632You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3633
3634@table @code
3635@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3636@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3637@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3638@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3639@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3640@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3641@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3642@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3643@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3644@end table
3645
3646The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3647@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3648defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3649
3650The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3651may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3652
3653The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3654
3655Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3656
3657You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3658statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3659section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3660
3661The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3662expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3663
3664Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3665assignments may be used:
3666
3667@smallexample
3668floating_point = 0;
3669SECTIONS
3670@{
3671 .text :
3672 @{
3673 *(.text)
3674 _etext = .;
3675 @}
156e34dd 3676 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3677 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3678@}
3679@end smallexample
3680@noindent
3681In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3682zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3683the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3684defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3685upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3686
eb8476a6
MR
3687@node HIDDEN
3688@subsection HIDDEN
3689@cindex HIDDEN
3690For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3691exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3692
3693Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3694@code{HIDDEN}:
3695
3696@smallexample
3697HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3698SECTIONS
3699@{
3700 .text :
3701 @{
3702 *(.text)
3703 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3704 @}
3705 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3706 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3707@}
3708@end smallexample
3709@noindent
3710In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3711
252b5132
RH
3712@node PROVIDE
3713@subsection PROVIDE
3714@cindex PROVIDE
3715In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3716only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3717the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3718@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3719@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3720@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3721@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3722@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3723
3724Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3725@smallexample
3726SECTIONS
3727@{
3728 .text :
3729 @{
3730 *(.text)
3731 _etext = .;
3732 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3733 @}
3734@}
3735@end smallexample
3736
3737In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3738underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3739the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3740underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3741If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3742linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3743
7af8e998
L
3744@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3745@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3746@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3747Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3748hidden and won't be exported.
3749
73ae6183
NC
3750@node Source Code Reference
3751@subsection Source Code Reference
3752
3753Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3754intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3755a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3756symbol that does not have a value.
3757
3758Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3759transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3760stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3761prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3762mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3763of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3764variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3765linker script variable might be referred to as:
3766
3767@smallexample
3768 extern int foo;
3769@end smallexample
3770
3771But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3772
3773@smallexample
3774 _foo = 1000;
3775@end smallexample
3776
3777In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3778transformation has taken place.
3779
3780When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3781things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3782in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3783second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3784table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3785contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3786value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3787
3788@smallexample
3789 int foo = 1000;
3790@end smallexample
3791
10bf6894 3792creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
73ae6183
NC
3793holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3794number 1000 is initially stored.
3795
3796When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3797first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3798memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3799So:
3800
3801@smallexample
3802 foo = 1;
3803@end smallexample
3804
3805looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3806associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3807address. Whereas:
3808
3809@smallexample
3810 int * a = & foo;
3811@end smallexample
3812
10bf6894 3813looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
73ae6183
NC
3814and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3815the variable @samp{a}.
3816
3817Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3818the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3819an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3820
3821@smallexample
3822 foo = 1000;
3823@end smallexample
3824
3825creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3826the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3827address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3828linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3829access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3830
3831Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3832you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3833use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3834section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3835linker script contains these declarations:
3836
3837@smallexample
3838@group
3839 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3840 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3841 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3842@end group
3843@end smallexample
3844
3845Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3846
3847@smallexample
3848@group
3849 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 3850
73ae6183
NC
3851 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3852@end group
3853@end smallexample
3854
3855Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3856
252b5132 3857@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 3858@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
3859@kindex SECTIONS
3860The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3861into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3862
3863The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3864@smallexample
3865SECTIONS
3866@{
3867 @var{sections-command}
3868 @var{sections-command}
3869 @dots{}
3870@}
3871@end smallexample
3872
3873Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3874
3875@itemize @bullet
3876@item
3877an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3878@item
3879a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3880@item
3881an output section description
3882@item
3883an overlay description
3884@end itemize
3885
3886The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3887@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3888those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3889understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3890the layout of the output file.
3891
3892Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3893below.
3894
3895If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3896linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3897section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3898input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3899example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3900in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3901
3902@menu
3903* Output Section Description:: Output section description
3904* Output Section Name:: Output section name
3905* Output Section Address:: Output section address
3906* Input Section:: Input section description
3907* Output Section Data:: Output section data
3908* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3909* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3910* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3911* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3912@end menu
3913
3914@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 3915@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
3916The full description of an output section looks like this:
3917@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 3918@group
7e7d5768 3919@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 3920 [AT(@var{lma})]
1eec346e 3921 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
3922 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
3923 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
3924 @{
3925 @var{output-section-command}
3926 @var{output-section-command}
3927 @dots{}
abc9061b 3928 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
252b5132
RH
3929@end group
3930@end smallexample
3931
3932Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3933
3934The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3935name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
abc9061b
CC
3936The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
3937the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
252b5132
RH
3938The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3939
3940Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3941
3942@itemize @bullet
3943@item
3944a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3945@item
3946an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3947@item
3948data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3949@item
3950a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3951@end itemize
3952
3953@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 3954@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
3955@cindex name, section
3956@cindex section name
3957The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3958meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3959support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3960must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3961example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3962output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3963names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3964quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3965characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3966commas must be quoted.
3967
3968The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3969Discarding}.
3970
3971@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 3972@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
3973@cindex address, section
3974@cindex section address
3975The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
3976address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
3977is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
3978
3979If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
3980section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
3981to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
3982alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
3983contained within the output section.
3984
3985The output section address heuristic is as follows:
3986
3987@itemize @bullet
3988@item
3989If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
3990is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
3991in that region.
3992
3993@item
3994If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
3995regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
3996section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
3997be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
3998
3999@item
4000If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4001the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4002counter.
4003@end itemize
4004
4005@noindent
4006For example:
4007
252b5132
RH
4008@smallexample
4009.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4010@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4011
252b5132
RH
4012@noindent
4013and
ea5cae92 4014
252b5132
RH
4015@smallexample
4016.text : @{ *(.text) @}
4017@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4018
252b5132
RH
4019@noindent
4020are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4021@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4022counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
4023counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4024input sections.
252b5132
RH
4025
4026The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4027For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4028so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4029do something like this:
4030@smallexample
4031.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4032@end smallexample
4033@noindent
4034This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4035aligned upward to the specified value.
4036
4037Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
4038location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4039sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
4040
4041@node Input Section
36f63dca 4042@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
4043@cindex input sections
4044@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4045The most common output section command is an input section description.
4046
4047The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4048You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4049in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4050map the input files into your memory layout.
4051
4052@menu
4053* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4054* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4055* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4056* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4057* Input Section Example:: Input section example
4058@end menu
4059
4060@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 4061@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
4062@cindex input section basics
4063An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4064by a list of section names in parentheses.
4065
4066The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4067describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4068
4069The most common input section description is to include all input
4070sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4071include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4072@smallexample
4073*(.text)
4074@end smallexample
4075@noindent
18625d54
CM
4076Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
4077of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4078match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4079example:
252b5132 4080@smallexample
b4346c09 4081*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 4082@end smallexample
765b7cbe
JB
4083will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
4084@file{otherfile.o} to be included.
252b5132
RH
4085
4086There are two ways to include more than one section:
4087@smallexample
4088*(.text .rdata)
4089*(.text) *(.rdata)
4090@end smallexample
4091@noindent
4092The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4093@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
4094first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4095they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
4096@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4097@samp{.rdata} input sections.
4098
4099You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4100You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4101needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4102@smallexample
4103data.o(.data)
4104@end smallexample
4105
ae17ab41
CM
4106To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4107of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4108
4109Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4110
4111@smallexample
4112@group
4113SECTIONS @{
4114 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4115 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4116@}
4117@end group
4118@end smallexample
4119
4120In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4121input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4122@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4123@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4124whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4125
967928e9
AM
4126You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4127matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4128with no whitespace around the colon.
4129
4130@table @samp
4131@item archive:file
4132matches file within archive
4133@item archive:
4134matches the whole archive
4135@item :file
4136matches file but not one in an archive
4137@end table
4138
4139Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4140wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4141single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4142@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4143within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4144also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4145other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4146from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4147command.
4148
252b5132
RH
4149If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4150the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4151commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4152@smallexample
4153data.o
4154@end smallexample
4155
967928e9
AM
4156When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4157and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
4158characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4159name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4160did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4161though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4162@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4163the archive search path.
4164
4165@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 4166@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
4167@cindex input section wildcards
4168@cindex wildcard file name patterns
4169@cindex file name wildcard patterns
4170@cindex section name wildcard patterns
4171In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4172name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4173
4174The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4175pattern for the file name.
4176
4177The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4178
4179@table @samp
4180@item *
4181matches any number of characters
4182@item ?
4183matches any single character
4184@item [@var{chars}]
4185matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4186character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4187@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4188@item \
4189quotes the following character
4190@end table
4191
4192When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4193will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4194Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4195exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4196@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4197a @samp{/} character.
4198
4199File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4200specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4201does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4202
4203If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4204appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4205will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4206sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4207@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4208@smallexample
4209.data : @{ *(.data) @}
4210.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4211@end smallexample
4212
bcaa7b3e 4213@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
4214Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4215in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
4216this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4217pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4218@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
4219into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4220
bcaa7b3e
L
4221@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4222@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4223difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
1ae5c3ae 4224descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
ee83b8a6
NC
4225Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4226reduce the amount of padding necessary.
bcaa7b3e 4227
02ecc8e9
L
4228@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4229@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4230difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4231ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4232encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4233
bcaa7b3e
L
4234@cindex SORT
4235@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4236
4237When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4238can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4239
4240@enumerate
4241@item
4242@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4243It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4244sections have the same name.
4245@item
4246@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4247It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4248sections have the same alignment.
4249@item
c0065db7 4250@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
4251treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4252@item
4253@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4254is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4255@item
4256All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4257@end enumerate
4258
4259When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4260section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4261takes precedence over the command line option.
4262
4263If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4264command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4265treated as nested sorting command.
4266
4267@enumerate
4268@item
4269@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4270@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4271@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4272@item
4273@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4274@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4275@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4276@end enumerate
4277
4278If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4279command line option will be ignored.
4280
eda680f8
L
4281@cindex SORT_NONE
4282@code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4283section sorting option.
4284
252b5132
RH
4285If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4286@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4287precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4288
4289This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4290files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4291sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4292The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4293with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4294linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4295@smallexample
4296@group
4297SECTIONS @{
4298 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4299 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4300 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4301 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4302@}
4303@end group
4304@end smallexample
4305
4306@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4307@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4308@cindex common symbol placement
4309@cindex uninitialized data placement
4310A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4311file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4312linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4313named @samp{COMMON}.
4314
4315You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4316other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4317particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4318input files are placed in another section.
4319
4320In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4321@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4322@smallexample
4323.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4324@end smallexample
4325
4326@cindex scommon section
4327@cindex small common symbols
4328Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4329example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4330symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4331different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4332the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4333symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4334to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4335locations.
4336
4337@cindex [COMMON]
4338You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4339notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4340@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4341
4342@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4343@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4344@cindex KEEP
4345@cindex garbage collection
4346When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4347it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4348This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4349with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4350@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4351
4352@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4353@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4354The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4355to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4356start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4357@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4358follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4359@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4360@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4361All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4362files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4363
4364@smallexample
4365@group
4366SECTIONS @{
4367 outputa 0x10000 :
4368 @{
4369 all.o
4370 foo.o (.input1)
4371 @}
36f63dca
NC
4372@end group
4373@group
252b5132
RH
4374 outputb :
4375 @{
4376 foo.o (.input2)
4377 foo1.o (.input1)
4378 @}
36f63dca
NC
4379@end group
4380@group
252b5132
RH
4381 outputc :
4382 @{
4383 *(.input1)
4384 *(.input2)
4385 @}
4386@}
4387@end group
a1ab1d2a 4388@end smallexample
252b5132
RH
4389
4390@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4391@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4392@cindex data
4393@cindex section data
4394@cindex output section data
4395@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4396@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4397@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4398@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4399@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4400You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4401@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4402an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4403parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4404value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4405counter.
4406
4407The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4408store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4409bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4410stored.
4411
4412For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4413of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4414@smallexample
4415BYTE(1)
4416LONG(addr)
4417@end smallexample
4418
4419When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4420same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4421target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4422@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4423@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4424
4425If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4426which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4427When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4428true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4429endianness of the first input object file.
4430
36f63dca 4431Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4432between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4433@smallexample
4434SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4435@end smallexample
4436whereas this will work:
4437@smallexample
4438SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4439@end smallexample
4440
252b5132
RH
4441@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4442@cindex holes, filling
4443@cindex unspecified memory
4444You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4445current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4446otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4447gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4448with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4449necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4450point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4451than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4452different parts of an output section.
4453
4454This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4455value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4456@smallexample
563e308f 4457FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4458@end smallexample
4459
4460The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4461section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4462part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4463entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4464precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4465expression.
252b5132
RH
4466
4467@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4468@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4469There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4470commands.
4471
4472@table @code
4473@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4474@cindex input filename symbols
4475@cindex filename symbols
4476@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4477The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4478The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4479file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4480the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4481
4482This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4483normally used for any other object file format.
4484
4485@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4486@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4487@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4488@item CONSTRUCTORS
4489When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4490unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4491destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4492arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4493automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4494For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4495linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4496@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4497ignored for other object file formats.
4498
4499The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4500constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4501Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4502the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4503first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4504of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4505compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4506formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4507@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4508the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4509destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4510@code{exit}.
4511
4512For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4513arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4514addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4515and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4516linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4517runtime code expects to see.
4518
4519@smallexample
4520 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4521 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4522 *(.ctors)
4523 LONG(0)
4524 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4525 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4526 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4527 *(.dtors)
4528 LONG(0)
4529 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4530@end smallexample
4531
4532If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4533which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4534are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4535are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4536command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4537@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4538@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4539@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4540
4541Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4542and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4543need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4544scripts.
4545
4546@end table
4547
4548@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4549@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4550@cindex discarding sections
4551@cindex sections, discarding
4552@cindex removing sections
2edab91c
AM
4553The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4554This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4555may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4556@smallexample
49c13adb 4557.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4558@end smallexample
4559@noindent
4560will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4561@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4562sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
2edab91c
AM
4563space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4564too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4565space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4566@samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4567@samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4568This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
74541ad4 4569
a0976ea4 4570The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4571on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4572symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4573the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4574section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4575
4576@cindex /DISCARD/
4577The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4578input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4579section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4580
4581@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4582@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4583@cindex output section attributes
4584We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4585like this:
0c71d759 4586
252b5132 4587@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4588@group
7e7d5768 4589@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4590 [AT(@var{lma})]
4591 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4592 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4593 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4594 @{
4595 @var{output-section-command}
4596 @var{output-section-command}
4597 @dots{}
562d3460 4598 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4599@end group
4600@end smallexample
0c71d759 4601
252b5132
RH
4602We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4603@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4604remaining section attributes.
4605
a1ab1d2a 4606@menu
252b5132
RH
4607* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4608* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4609* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4610* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4611* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4612* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4613* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4614* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4615@end menu
4616
4617@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4618@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4619Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4620parentheses. The following types are defined:
4621
4622@table @code
4623@item NOLOAD
4624The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4625loaded into memory when the program is run.
4626@item DSECT
4627@itemx COPY
4628@itemx INFO
4629@itemx OVERLAY
4630These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4631rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4632marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4633section when the program is run.
4634@end table
4635
4636@kindex NOLOAD
4637@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4638@cindex loading, preventing
4639The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4640the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4641the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4642@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 4643need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
4644@smallexample
4645@group
4646SECTIONS @{
4647 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4648 @dots{}
4649@}
4650@end group
4651@end smallexample
4652
4653@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4654@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4655@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4656@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4657@cindex load address
4658@cindex section load address
4659Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
4660@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4661@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4662specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4663address is optional.
6bdafbeb 4664
ea5cae92
NC
4665The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4666specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4667takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4668load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4669region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4670
4671If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
4672section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4673load address:
4674
4675@itemize @bullet
4676@item
4677If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4678the LMA address as well.
4679
4680@item
4681If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4682
4683@item
4684Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4685with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4686section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4687VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4688the last section in the located region.
4689
4690@item
4691If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4692that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4693
4694@item
4695If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4696section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4697@end itemize
252b5132
RH
4698
4699@cindex ROM initialized data
4700@cindex initialized data in ROM
4701This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4702example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4703called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4704@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4705even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4706uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4707defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4708counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4709
4710@smallexample
4711@group
4712SECTIONS
4713 @{
4714 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 4715 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
4716 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4717 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4718 .bss 0x3000 :
4719 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4720@}
4721@end group
4722@end smallexample
4723
4724The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4725this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4726the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4727how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4728script.
4729
4730@smallexample
4731@group
4732extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4733char *src = &_etext;
4734char *dst = &_data;
4735
ea5cae92
NC
4736/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4737while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 4738 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 4739
ea5cae92 4740/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
4741for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4742 *dst = 0;
4743@end group
4744@end smallexample
4745
bbf115d3
L
4746@node Forced Output Alignment
4747@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4748@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4749@cindex forcing output section alignment
4750@cindex output section alignment
1eec346e 4751You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
13075d04
SH
4752alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
4753intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
bbf115d3 4754
7e7d5768
AM
4755@node Forced Input Alignment
4756@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4757@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4758@cindex forcing input section alignment
4759@cindex input section alignment
4760You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4761SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4762sections, whether larger or smaller.
4763
0c71d759
NC
4764@node Output Section Constraint
4765@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4766@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4767@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4768@cindex constraints on output sections
4769You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4770of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4771read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4772@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4773
252b5132 4774@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 4775@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
4776@kindex >@var{region}
4777@cindex section, assigning to memory region
4778@cindex memory regions and sections
4779You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4780using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4781
4782Here is a simple example:
4783@smallexample
4784@group
4785MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4786SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4787@end group
4788@end smallexample
4789
4790@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 4791@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
4792@kindex :@var{phdr}
4793@cindex section, assigning to program header
4794@cindex program headers and sections
4795You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4796using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4797one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4798assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4799@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4800linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4801
4802Here is a simple example:
4803@smallexample
4804@group
4805PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4806SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4807@end group
4808@end smallexample
4809
4810@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 4811@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
4812@kindex =@var{fillexp}
4813@cindex section fill pattern
4814@cindex fill pattern, entire section
4815You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4816@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4817(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4818within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
4819alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4820necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 4821of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
4822an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4823fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 4824other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
4825pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4826expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
4827
4828You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 4829output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
4830
4831Here is a simple example:
4832@smallexample
4833@group
563e308f 4834SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
4835@end group
4836@end smallexample
4837
4838@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 4839@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
4840@kindex OVERLAY
4841@cindex overlays
4842An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4843are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4844the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4845copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4846required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4847can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4848than another.
4849
4850Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4851@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4852output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4853command is as follows:
4854@smallexample
4855@group
4856OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4857 @{
4858 @var{secname1}
4859 @{
4860 @var{output-section-command}
4861 @var{output-section-command}
4862 @dots{}
4863 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4864 @var{secname2}
4865 @{
4866 @var{output-section-command}
4867 @var{output-section-command}
4868 @dots{}
4869 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4870 @dots{}
abc9061b 4871 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
252b5132
RH
4872@end group
4873@end smallexample
4874
4875Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4876section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4877section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
11e7fd74 4878those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
252b5132
RH
4879except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4880sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4881
abc9061b
CC
4882The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
4883the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
4884
252b5132
RH
4885The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4886addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4887memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4888whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4889and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4890and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4891
56dd11f0
NC
4892If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
4893references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
4894the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
4895sense for one section to refer directly to another.
4896@xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
252b5132
RH
4897
4898For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 4899provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
4900defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4901@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4902the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4903within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4904symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4905
4906At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4907the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4908
4909Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4910@code{SECTIONS} construct.
4911@smallexample
4912@group
4913 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4914 @{
4915 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4916 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4917 @}
4918@end group
4919@end smallexample
4920@noindent
4921This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4922address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4923@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 4924following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
4925@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4926@code{__load_stop_text1}.
4927
4928C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4929like the following.
4930
4931@smallexample
4932@group
4933 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4934 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4935 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4936@end group
4937@end smallexample
4938
4939Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4940everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4941example could have been written identically as follows.
4942
4943@smallexample
4944@group
4945 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4946 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4947 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 4948 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4949 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4950 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
4951 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4952@end group
4953@end smallexample
4954
4955@node MEMORY
36f63dca 4956@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
4957@kindex MEMORY
4958@cindex memory regions
4959@cindex regions of memory
4960@cindex allocating memory
4961@cindex discontinuous memory
4962The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4963memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4964
4965The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4966memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4967may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4968can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4969set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4970regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4971around to fit into the available regions.
4972
4973A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4974command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4975you wish. The syntax is:
4976@smallexample
4977@group
a1ab1d2a 4978MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4979 @{
4980 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4981 @dots{}
4982 @}
4983@end group
4984@end smallexample
4985
4986The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4987region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4988Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4989with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
4990must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
4991add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
9d5777a3 4992command.
252b5132
RH
4993
4994@cindex memory region attributes
4995The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4996whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4997not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
4998@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4999section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5000the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5001them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5002
5003The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5004@table @samp
5005@item R
5006Read-only section
5007@item W
5008Read/write section
5009@item X
5010Executable section
5011@item A
5012Allocatable section
5013@item I
5014Initialized section
5015@item L
5016Same as @samp{I}
5017@item !
c09e9a8c 5018Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
5019@end table
5020
5021If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5022@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
5023attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
5024in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
5025attributes.
5026
5027@kindex ORIGIN =
5028@kindex o =
5029@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
5030The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5031the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5032cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5033abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5034@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
5035
5036@kindex LENGTH =
5037@kindex len =
5038@kindex l =
5039The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5040region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
5041be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5042@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
5043
5044In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5045available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5046and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5047linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5048is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5049or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5050explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5051region.
5052
5053@smallexample
5054@group
a1ab1d2a 5055MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5056 @{
5057 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5058 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5059 @}
5060@end group
5061@end smallexample
5062
5063Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5064specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5065@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5066a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5067output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5068was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5069the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5070output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5071region, the linker will issue an error message.
5072
3ec57632 5073It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 5074expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
5075@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5076
5077@smallexample
5078@group
c0065db7 5079 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
5080@end group
5081@end smallexample
5082
252b5132
RH
5083@node PHDRS
5084@section PHDRS Command
5085@kindex PHDRS
5086@cindex program headers
5087@cindex ELF program headers
5088@cindex program segments
5089@cindex segments, ELF
5090The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5091@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5092loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5093program with the @samp{-p} option.
5094
5095When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5096reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5097program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5098This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5099interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5100
5101The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5102in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5103precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5104the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5105not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5106
5107The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5108generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5109ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5110
5111This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5112@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5113
5114@smallexample
5115@group
5116PHDRS
5117@{
5118 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5119 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5120@}
5121@end group
5122@end smallexample
5123
5124The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5125of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5126header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5127with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
5128must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5129is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
5130
5131Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5132system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5133specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5134sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5135attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5136Section Phdr}.
5137
5138It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5139merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5140repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5141contain the section.
5142
5143If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5144then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5145not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5146convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5147placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5148default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5149segment at all.
5150
5151@kindex FILEHDR
5152@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 5153You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
5154the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5155The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5156file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 5157include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
5158segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5159these keywords.
252b5132
RH
5160
5161The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5162value of the keyword.
5163
5164@table @asis
5165@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5166Indicates an unused program header.
5167
5168@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5169Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5170the file.
5171
5172@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5173Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5174
5175@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5176Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5177found.
5178
5179@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5180Indicates a segment holding note information.
5181
5182@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5183A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5184ABI.
5185
5186@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5187Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5188
5189@item @var{expression}
5190An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5191be used for types not defined above.
5192@end table
5193
5194You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5195in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5196@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5197Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5198output section attribute.
5199
5200The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5201which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5202explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5203an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5204header.
5205
5206Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5207headers used on a native ELF system.
5208
5209@example
5210@group
5211PHDRS
5212@{
5213 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5214 interp PT_INTERP ;
5215 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5216 data PT_LOAD ;
5217 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5218@}
5219
5220SECTIONS
5221@{
5222 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5223 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5224 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5225 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5226 @dots{}
5227 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5228 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5229 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5230 @dots{}
5231@}
5232@end group
5233@end example
5234
5235@node VERSION
5236@section VERSION Command
5237@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5238@cindex symbol versions
5239@cindex version script
5240@cindex versions of symbols
5241The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5242only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5243symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5244a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5245shared library.
5246
5247You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5248you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5249also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5250
5251The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5252@smallexample
5253VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5254@end smallexample
5255
5256The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5257Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5258version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5259version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5260version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5261scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5262library.
5263
5264The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5265examples.
5266
5267@smallexample
5268VERS_1.1 @{
5269 global:
5270 foo1;
5271 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
5272 old*;
5273 original*;
5274 new*;
252b5132
RH
5275@};
5276
5277VERS_1.2 @{
5278 foo2;
5279@} VERS_1.1;
5280
5281VERS_2.0 @{
5282 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 5283 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 5284 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
5285 "f(int, double)";
5286 @};
252b5132
RH
5287@} VERS_1.2;
5288@end smallexample
5289
5290This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5291version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5292The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5293a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5294of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5295symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5296is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5297in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5298However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5299name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5300
5301Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5302depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5303to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5304
5305Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5306depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5307and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5308
5309When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5310specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5311unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5312unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5313somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5314wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5315wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5316set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5317ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5318
5319The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5320they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5321could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5322However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5323
0f6bf451 5324Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5325in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5326symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5327won't.
5328
5329@smallexample
7c9c73be 5330@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5331@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5332
252b5132
RH
5333When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5334symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5335requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5336shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5337loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5338linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5339application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5340way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5341all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5342search for each symbol reference.
5343
5344The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5345doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5346that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5347functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5348the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5349required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5350that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5351versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5352the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5353
5354There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5355first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5356source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5357script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5358maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5359@smallexample
5360__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5361@end smallexample
5362@noindent
5363in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5364be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5365The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5366@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5367takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5368
5369The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5370function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5371an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5372version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5373linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5374
5375To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5376source file. Here is an example:
5377
5378@smallexample
5379__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5380__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5381__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5382__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5383@end smallexample
5384
5385In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5386unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5387example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5388@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5389
5390When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5391some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5392this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5393@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5394declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5395you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5396
5397If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5398within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5399(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5400specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5401
cb840a31
L
5402You can also specify the language in the version script:
5403
5404@smallexample
5405VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5406@end smallexample
5407
c0065db7 5408The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5409The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5410demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5411patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5412@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5413
86043bbb
MM
5414Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5415described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5416or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5417the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5418whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5419cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5420might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5421should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5422expect when you upgrade.
5423
252b5132
RH
5424@node Expressions
5425@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5426@cindex expressions
5427@cindex arithmetic
5428The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5429that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5430expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5431host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5432
5433You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5434
5435The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5436expressions.
5437
5438@menu
5439* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5440* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5441* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5442* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5443* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5444* Operators:: Operators
5445* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5446* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5447* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5448@end menu
5449
5450@node Constants
5451@subsection Constants
5452@cindex integer notation
5453@cindex constants in linker scripts
5454All constants are integers.
5455
5456As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5457octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8 5458hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
11e7fd74 5459@samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
8a308ae8
NC
5460@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5461value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5462
5463@cindex scaled integers
5464@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5465@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5466@cindex suffixes for integers
5467@cindex integer suffixes
5468In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5469constant by
5470@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5471@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5472@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5473@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5474@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5475@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5476@tex
5477${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5478@end tex
5479@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5480respectively. For example, the following
5481all refer to the same quantity:
5482
252b5132 5483@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5484_fourk_1 = 4K;
5485_fourk_2 = 4096;
5486_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5487_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5488@end smallexample
5489
8a308ae8
NC
5490Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5491conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5492
0c71d759
NC
5493@node Symbolic Constants
5494@subsection Symbolic Constants
5495@cindex symbolic constants
5496@kindex CONSTANT
5497It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5498the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5499
5500@table @code
5501@item MAXPAGESIZE
5502@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5503The target's maximum page size.
5504
5505@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5506@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5507The target's default page size.
5508@end table
5509
5510So for example:
5511
5512@smallexample
9d5777a3 5513 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
0c71d759
NC
5514@end smallexample
5515
5516will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5517supported by the target.
5518
252b5132
RH
5519@node Symbols
5520@subsection Symbol Names
5521@cindex symbol names
5522@cindex names
5523@cindex quoted symbol names
5524@kindex "
5525Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5526and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5527Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5528specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5529keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5530@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5531"SECTION" = 9;
5532"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5533@end smallexample
5534
5535Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5536to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5537whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5538
ecca9871
L
5539@node Orphan Sections
5540@subsection Orphan Sections
5541@cindex orphan
5542Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5543are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5544script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5545output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5546placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5547attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5548same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5549If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5550at the end of the file.
5551
5552For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5553well as section flag.
5554
41911f68 5555If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
a61ca861 5556the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
9aec8434 5557__start_SECNAME and __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
41911f68
NC
5558section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5559orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5560representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5561character.
5562
252b5132
RH
5563@node Location Counter
5564@subsection The Location Counter
5565@kindex .
5566@cindex dot
5567@cindex location counter
5568@cindex current output location
5569The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5570current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5571location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5572within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5573anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5574
5575@cindex holes
5576Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5577moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5578location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5579and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5580doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5581
5582@smallexample
5583SECTIONS
5584@{
5585 output :
5586 @{
5587 file1(.text)
5588 . = . + 1000;
5589 file2(.text)
5590 . += 1000;
5591 file3(.text)
563e308f 5592 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5593@}
5594@end smallexample
5595@noindent
5596In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5597located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5598followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5599@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5600@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5601specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5602
5c6bbab8
NC
5603@cindex dot inside sections
5604Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5605current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5606statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5607absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5608however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5609not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5610
5611@smallexample
5612SECTIONS
5613@{
5614 . = 0x100
5615 .text: @{
5616 *(.text)
5617 . = 0x200
5618 @}
5619 . = 0x500
5620 .data: @{
5621 *(.data)
5622 . += 0x600
5623 @}
5624@}
5625@end smallexample
5626
5627The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5628and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5629the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5630much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5631move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5632and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5633the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5634the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5635
b5666f2f
AM
5636@cindex dot outside sections
5637Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5638output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5639needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5640
5641@smallexample
5642SECTIONS
5643@{
5644 start_of_text = . ;
5645 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5646 end_of_text = . ;
5647
5648 start_of_data = . ;
5649 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5650 end_of_data = . ;
5651@}
5652@end smallexample
5653
5654If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5655not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5656between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5657should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5658blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5659the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5660sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5661statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5662special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5663place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5664as follows:
5665
5666@smallexample
5667SECTIONS
5668@{
5669 start_of_text = . ;
5670 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5671 end_of_text = . ;
5672
5673 start_of_data = . ;
5674 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5675 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5676 end_of_data = . ;
5677@}
5678@end smallexample
5679
5680This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5681@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5682placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5683assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5684a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5685section. So you could write:
5686
5687@smallexample
5688SECTIONS
5689@{
5690 start_of_text = . ;
5691 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5692 end_of_text = . ;
5693
5694 . = . ;
5695 start_of_data = . ;
5696 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5697 end_of_data = . ;
5698@}
5699@end smallexample
5700
5701Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5702@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5703
252b5132
RH
5704@need 2000
5705@node Operators
5706@subsection Operators
5707@cindex operators for arithmetic
5708@cindex arithmetic operators
5709@cindex precedence in expressions
5710The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5711the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5712@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5713@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5714@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5715@smallexample
5716precedence associativity Operators Notes
5717(highest)
57181 left ! - ~ (1)
57192 left * / %
57203 left + -
57214 left >> <<
57225 left == != > < <= >=
57236 left &
57247 left |
57258 left &&
57269 left ||
572710 right ? :
572811 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5729(lowest)
5730@end smallexample
5731Notes:
a1ab1d2a 5732(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
5733(2) @xref{Assignments}.
5734@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5735@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5736@tex
5737\vskip \baselineskip
5738%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5739\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5740\hrule
5741\halign
5742{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5743height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5744&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5745height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5746\noalign{\hrule}
5747height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5748&highest&&&&&\cr
5749% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 5750&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
5751&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5752&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5753&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5754&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5755&6&&left&&\&&\cr
5756&7&&left&&|&\cr
5757&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5758&9&&left&&||&\cr
5759&10&&right&&? :&\cr
5760&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5761&lowest&&&&&\cr
5762height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5763\hrule}
5764@end tex
5765@iftex
5766{
5767@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5768@dag@quad Prefix operators.
5769@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5770}
5771@end iftex
5772@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5773
5774@node Evaluation
5775@subsection Evaluation
5776@cindex lazy evaluation
5777@cindex expression evaluation order
5778The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5779an expression when absolutely necessary.
5780
5781The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5782address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5783regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5784as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5785
5786However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5787until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5788other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5789for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5790
5791The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5792assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5793allocation.
5794
5795Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5796@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5797
5798If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5799available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5800following
5801@smallexample
5802@group
5803SECTIONS
5804 @{
a1ab1d2a 5805 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
5806 @{ *(.text) @}
5807 @}
5808@end group
5809@end smallexample
5810@noindent
5811will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5812address}.
5813
5814@node Expression Section
5815@subsection The Section of an Expression
5816@cindex expression sections
5817@cindex absolute expressions
5818@cindex relative expressions
5819@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5820@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5821@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
5822Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
5823relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
5824using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
5825value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
5826symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
5827operations.
5828
abf4be64
AM
5829Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
5830section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
5831address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
5832@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
5833functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
5834One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
5835(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
5836differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
5837versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
5838section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
5839Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
5840absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
5841given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
5842everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
5843
5844In the following simple example,
252b5132 5845
7542af2a
AM
5846@smallexample
5847@group
5848SECTIONS
5849 @{
5850 . = 0x100;
5851 __executable_start = 0x100;
5852 .data :
5853 @{
5854 . = 0x10;
5855 __data_start = 0x10;
5856 *(.data)
5857 @}
5858 @dots{}
5859 @}
5860@end group
5861@end smallexample
252b5132 5862
7542af2a
AM
5863both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
5864address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
5865@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
5866section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 5867
5c3049d2
AM
5868For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
5869addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
5870
5871@itemize @bullet
5872@item
c05f749e
AM
5873Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
5874operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
5875absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
5876@item
7542af2a
AM
5877Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
5878relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
5879and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
5880@item
c05f749e
AM
5881Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
5882in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
5883address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
5884before applying the operator.
7542af2a
AM
5885@end itemize
5886
5887The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
5888
5889@itemize @bullet
5890@item
5891An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
5892@item
5893The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
5894@item
9bc8bb33 5895The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
11e7fd74 5896relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
9bc8bb33
AM
5897(after above conversions) is also a number.
5898@item
5899The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
5900relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
5901section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
5902@item
5903The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
5904conversions) is an absolute address.
5905@end itemize
252b5132
RH
5906
5907You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5908to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5909create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5910section @samp{.data}:
5911@smallexample
5912SECTIONS
5913 @{
5914 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5915 @}
5916@end smallexample
5917@noindent
5918If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5919@samp{.data} section.
5920
7542af2a
AM
5921Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
5922particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
5923
252b5132
RH
5924@node Builtin Functions
5925@subsection Builtin Functions
5926@cindex functions in expressions
5927The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5928use in linker script expressions.
5929
5930@table @code
5931@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5932@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5933@cindex expression, absolute
5934Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5935of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5936value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5937normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5938
5939@item ADDR(@var{section})
5940@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5941@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 5942Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 5943script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
5944the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
5945@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
5946@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
5947the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
5948@smallexample
5949@group
5950SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5951 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 5952 @{
252b5132
RH
5953 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5954 @dots{}
5955 @}
5956 .output :
5957 @{
5958 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5959 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5960 @}
5961@dots{} @}
5962@end group
5963@end smallexample
5964
876f4090
NS
5965@item ALIGN(@var{align})
5966@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5967@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5968@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
5969@cindex round up location counter
5970@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
5971@cindex round up expression
5972@cindex align expression
5973Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5974to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5975doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5976arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5977expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5978equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5979
5980Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5981next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5982variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5983input sections:
252b5132
RH
5984@smallexample
5985@group
5986SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5987 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5988 *(.data)
5989 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5990 @}
5991@dots{} @}
5992@end group
5993@end smallexample
5994@noindent
5995The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5996a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5997a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
5998of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5999
6000The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6001
362c1d1a
NS
6002@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6003@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6004@cindex section alignment
6005Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6006been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6007evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6008the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6009value in that section.
6010@smallexample
6011@group
6012SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6013 .output @{
6014 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6015 @dots{}
6016 @}
6017@dots{} @}
6018@end group
6019@end smallexample
6020
252b5132
RH
6021@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6022@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6023This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6024scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6025section.
6026
2d20f7bf
JJ
6027@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6028@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6029This is equivalent to either
6030@smallexample
6031(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6032@end smallexample
6033or
6034@smallexample
6035(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
6036@end smallexample
6037@noindent
6038depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6039for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6040@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6041If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6042memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6043bytes in the on-disk file.
6044
6045This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6046any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6047@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
6048be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
6049working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
6050
6051@noindent
6052Example:
6053@smallexample
6054 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6055@end smallexample
6056
6057@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6058@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6059This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6060evaluation purposes.
6061
6062@smallexample
6063 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6064@end smallexample
6065
a4f5ad88
JJ
6066@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6067@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6068This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
eec2f3ed 6069@samp{-z relro} option is used.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6070When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6071does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
6072@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
6073boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
6074it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
eec2f3ed
AM
6075@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6076padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6077section alignment.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6078
6079@smallexample
6080 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6081@end smallexample
6082
252b5132
RH
6083@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6084@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6085@cindex symbol defaults
6086Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
6087defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6088return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
6089default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6090shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6091the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6092existed, its value is preserved:
6093
6094@smallexample
6095@group
6096SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6097 .text : @{
6098 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6099 @dots{}
6100 @}
6101 @dots{}
6102@}
6103@end group
6104@end smallexample
6105
3ec57632
NC
6106@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6107@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6108Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6109
252b5132
RH
6110@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6111@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6112@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 6113Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
6114Section LMA}).
6115
2e53f7d6
NC
6116@item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6117@kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6118Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6119@code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6120
252b5132
RH
6121@kindex MAX
6122@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6123Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6124
6125@kindex MIN
6126@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6127Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6128
6129@item NEXT(@var{exp})
6130@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6131@cindex unallocated address, next
6132Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6133This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6134use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6135output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6136
3ec57632
NC
6137@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6138@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6139Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6140
ba916c8a
MM
6141@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6142@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6143Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
c5da8c7d
NC
6144value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6145@samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6146will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6147can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 6148``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
6149name.
6150
252b5132
RH
6151@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6152@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6153@cindex section size
6154Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6155been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6156evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6157@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6158@smallexample
6159@group
6160SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6161 .output @{
6162 .start = . ;
6163 @dots{}
6164 .end = . ;
6165 @}
6166 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6167 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6168@dots{} @}
6169@end group
6170@end smallexample
6171
6172@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6173@itemx sizeof_headers
6174@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6175@cindex header size
6176Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6177information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6178this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6179choose, to facilitate paging.
6180
6181@cindex not enough room for program headers
6182@cindex program headers, not enough room
6183When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6184@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6185number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6186addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6187additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6188room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6189the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6190script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6191you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6192command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6193@end table
6194
6195@node Implicit Linker Scripts
6196@section Implicit Linker Scripts
6197@cindex implicit linker scripts
6198If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6199an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6200linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6201linker will report an error.
6202
6203An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6204
6205Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6206assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6207commands.
6208
6209Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6210at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6211read. This can affect archive searching.
6212
6213@ifset GENERIC
6214@node Machine Dependent
6215@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6216
6217@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
6218@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6219sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
6220functionality are not listed.
6221
6222@menu
36f63dca
NC
6223@ifset H8300
6224* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6225@end ifset
6226@ifset I960
6227* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6228@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
6229@ifset M68HC11
6230* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6231@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
6232@ifset ARM
6233* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6234@end ifset
6235@ifset HPPA
6236* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6237@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
6238@ifset M68K
6239* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6240@end ifset
833794fc
MR
6241@ifset MIPS
6242* MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6243@end ifset
3c3bdf30 6244@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 6245* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 6246@end ifset
2469cfa2 6247@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 6248* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 6249@end ifset
35c08157
KLC
6250@ifset NDS32
6251* NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6252@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
6253@ifset NIOSII
6254* Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6255@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
6256@ifset POWERPC
6257* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6258@end ifset
6259@ifset POWERPC64
6260* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6261@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
6262@ifset SPU
6263* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6264@end ifset
74459f0e 6265@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 6266* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 6267@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
6268@ifset WIN32
6269* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6270@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
6271@ifset XTENSA
6272* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6273@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6274@end menu
6275@end ifset
6276
252b5132
RH
6277@ifset H8300
6278@ifclear GENERIC
6279@raisesections
6280@end ifclear
6281
6282@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 6283@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
6284
6285@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 6286For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
6287you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6288
6289@table @emph
6290@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6291@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 6292@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
6293targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6294program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6295respectively.
6296
6297@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6298@item synthesizing instructions
81f5558e 6299@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
ff5dcc92 6300@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
6301sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6302page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6303(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6304@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6305top page of memory).
1502569c 6306
81f5558e
NC
6307@command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6308indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6309displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6310the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6311@code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6312whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6313range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6314
1502569c 6315@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6316@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6317biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6318which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6319page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6320(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6321@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6322the top page of memory).
6323
6324@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6325@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
632632 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6327changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6328(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6329@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6330the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6331@end table
6332
6333@ifclear GENERIC
6334@lowersections
6335@end ifclear
6336@end ifset
6337
36f63dca 6338@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6339@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6340@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6341@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6342@node Renesas
6343@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6344
c2dcd04e
NC
6345@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6346H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6347options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6348@end ifset
6349@end ifclear
6350
6351@ifset I960
6352@ifclear GENERIC
6353@raisesections
6354@end ifclear
6355
6356@node i960
6357@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6358
6359@cindex i960 support
6360
6361You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6362specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6363family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6364incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6365linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6366libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6367search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6368
6369For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6370well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6371paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6372the names
6373
6374@smallexample
6375@group
6376try
6377libtry.a
6378tryca
6379libtryca.a
6380@end group
6381@end smallexample
6382
6383@noindent
6384The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6385two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6386
6387You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6388the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6389use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6390specifies a library.
6391
6392@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6393@cindex relaxing on i960
6394@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6395you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6396@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6397them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6398instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6399instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6400target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6401not itself call any subroutines).
6402
6403@ifclear GENERIC
6404@lowersections
6405@end ifclear
6406@end ifset
6407
6408@ifset ARM
6409@ifclear GENERIC
6410@raisesections
6411@end ifclear
6412
93fd0973
SC
6413@ifset M68HC11
6414@ifclear GENERIC
6415@raisesections
6416@end ifclear
6417
6418@node M68HC11/68HC12
6419@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6420
6421@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6422
6423@subsection Linker Relaxation
6424
6425For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6426optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6427
6428@table @emph
6429@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6430@item relaxing address modes
6431@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6432targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6433program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6434respectively.
6435
6436@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6437transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6438page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6439
6440@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6441When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6442of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6443addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6444@code{bset} instructions.
6445
6446@end table
6447
6448@subsection Trampoline Generation
6449
6450@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6451@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6452For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6453call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6454will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6455trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6456case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6457point to the function trampoline.
6458
6459@ifclear GENERIC
6460@lowersections
6461@end ifclear
6462@end ifset
6463
36f63dca 6464@node ARM
3674e28a 6465@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6466
6467@cindex ARM interworking support
6468@kindex --support-old-code
6469For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6470between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6471been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6472line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6473libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6474option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6475given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6476which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6477the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6478non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6479
6480@cindex thumb entry point
6481@cindex entry point, thumb
6482@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6483The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6484@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6485But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6486branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6487executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6488
ce11ba6c
KT
6489@cindex PE import table prefixing
6490@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6491The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6492the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
11e7fd74 6493element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
ce11ba6c
KT
6494import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6495
e489d0ae
PB
6496@cindex BE8
6497@kindex --be8
6498The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
080bb7bb
NC
6499executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6500objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6501option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6502little-endian code.
e489d0ae 6503
3674e28a
PB
6504@cindex TARGET1
6505@kindex --target1-rel
6506@kindex --target1-abs
6507The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6508@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6509or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6510and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6511
6512@cindex TARGET2
6513@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6514The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6515@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6516meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6517@table @samp
6518@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6519@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6520@item abs
6521@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6522@item got-rel
6523@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6524@end table
6525
319850b4
JB
6526@cindex FIX_V4BX
6527@kindex --fix-v4bx
6528The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6529specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6530interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6531also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6532
6533In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6534linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6535@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6536
6537In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6538relocations are ignored.
6539
845b51d6
PB
6540@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6541@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6542Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6543relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6544
6545@smallexample
6546TST rM, #1
6547MOVEQ PC, rM
6548BX Rn
6549@end smallexample
6550
6551This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6552and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
11e7fd74 6553condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
845b51d6 6554
33bfe774
JB
6555@cindex USE_BLX
6556@kindex --use-blx
6557The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6558BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6559situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6560code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6561each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6562
6563This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6564specify it if you are using that target.
6565
c6dd86c6
JB
6566@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6567@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6568The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6569bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6570instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6571to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6572the support code can read the intended values.
6573
6574The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6575intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6576and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6577intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6578full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6579you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6580
6581If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6582enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6583@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6584mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6585vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6586@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6587
6588If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6589potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6590such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6591first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6592instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6593the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6594are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6595
2de70689
MGD
6596@cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6597@kindex --fix-arm1176
6598@kindex --no-fix-arm1176
9d5777a3
RM
6599The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6600in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6601are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
2de70689
MGD
6602unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6603
9d5777a3 6604Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
11e7fd74 6605Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
2de70689
MGD
6606http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6607
bf21ed78
MS
6608@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6609@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6610The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6611warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6612enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6613linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6614using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6615not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6616
6617@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6618@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6619The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6620warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6621@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6622linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6623using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6624
726150b7
NC
6625@cindex PIC_VENEER
6626@kindex --pic-veneer
6627The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6628ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6629is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6630@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6631
6632@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6633@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6634The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6635code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6636perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6637placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6638controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6639The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
11e7fd74 6640duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
726150b7
NC
6641group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6642code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6643where they should be placed.
6644
6645The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6646@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 6647placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
6648branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6649placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6650value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6651exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6652A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6653linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6654from the input sections.
6655
6656The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6657@samp{N = +1}.
6658
1a51c1a4
NC
6659Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6660only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6661otherwise.
6662
1db37fe6
YG
6663@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6664@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6665@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6666The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6667
6668The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6669
68fcca92
JW
6670@cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
6671@kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
6672@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
6673The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
6674
6675Please contact ARM for further details.
6676
1db37fe6
YG
6677@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6678@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6679@cindex Merging exidx entries
6680The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6681
6682@kindex --long-plt
6683@cindex 32-bit PLT entries
6684The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
6685which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
6686entries which only support 512Mb of code.
6687
36f63dca
NC
6688@ifclear GENERIC
6689@lowersections
6690@end ifclear
6691@end ifset
6692
6693@ifset HPPA
6694@ifclear GENERIC
6695@raisesections
6696@end ifclear
6697
6698@node HPPA ELF32
6699@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6700@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6701@kindex --multi-subspace
6702When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6703import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6704The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6705stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6706multiple sub-spaces.
6707
6708@cindex HPPA stub grouping
6709@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6710Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6711stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6712@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6713sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6714a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6715the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6716conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6717prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6718A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6719branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6720@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6721@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6722detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6723positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6724
6725Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6726single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6727create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6728large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6729
6730@ifclear GENERIC
6731@lowersections
6732@end ifclear
6733@end ifset
6734
7fb9f789
NC
6735@ifset M68K
6736@ifclear GENERIC
6737@raisesections
6738@end ifclear
6739
6740@node M68K
6741@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6742
6743@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6744@kindex --got=@var{type}
6745The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6746The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6747@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6748the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6749@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6750entries only at non-negative offsets.
6751@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6752entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6753support such GOTs.
6754@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6755output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6756file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6757files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6758
6759@ifclear GENERIC
6760@lowersections
6761@end ifclear
6762@end ifset
6763
833794fc
MR
6764@ifset MIPS
6765@ifclear GENERIC
6766@raisesections
6767@end ifclear
6768
6769@node MIPS
6770@section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6771
6772@cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
6773@kindex --insn32
6774@kindex --no-insn32
6775The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
6776microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
6777in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
6778used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
6779or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
6780including 16-bit ones where possible.
6781
6782@ifclear GENERIC
6783@lowersections
6784@end ifclear
6785@end ifset
6786
36f63dca
NC
6787@ifset MMIX
6788@ifclear GENERIC
6789@raisesections
6790@end ifclear
6791
6792@node MMIX
6793@section @code{ld} and MMIX
6794For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6795@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6796understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6797can translate between the two formats.
6798
6799There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6800Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6801registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6802equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6803@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6804global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6805this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6806symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6807
7a2de473
HPN
6808Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6809@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6810The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6811of a section.
36f63dca
NC
6812
6813Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6814are left out from an mmo file.
6815
6816@ifclear GENERIC
6817@lowersections
6818@end ifclear
6819@end ifset
6820
6821@ifset MSP430
6822@ifclear GENERIC
6823@raisesections
6824@end ifclear
6825
6826@node MSP430
6827@section @code{ld} and MSP430
6828For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6829will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6830just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6831
6832@cindex MSP430 extra sections
6833The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6834
6835@table @code
6836@item @samp{.vectors}
6837Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6838
6839@item @samp{.bootloader}
6840Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6841in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6842
6843@item @samp{.infomem}
6844Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6845this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6846
c0065db7 6847@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
6848This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6849in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6850
6851@item @samp{.noinit}
6852Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6853
c0065db7 6854The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
6855@end table
6856
6857@ifclear GENERIC
6858@lowersections
6859@end ifclear
6860@end ifset
6861
35c08157
KLC
6862@ifset NDS32
6863@ifclear GENERIC
6864@raisesections
6865@end ifclear
6866
6867@node NDS32
6868@section @code{ld} and NDS32
6869@kindex relaxing on NDS32
6870For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
6871relaxes objects according to these options.
6872
6873@table @code
6874@item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
6875Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
6876
6877@item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
6878Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
6879
6880@item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
6881Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
6882
6883@item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
6884Export the EX9 table after linking.
6885
6886@item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
6887Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
6888
6889@item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
6890Update the existing EX9 table.
6891
6892@item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
6893Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
6894
6895@item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
6896Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
6897
6898@item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
6899Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
6900
6901@item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
6902Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
6903@end table
6904
6905@ifclear GENERIC
6906@lowersections
6907@end ifclear
6908@end ifset
6909
78058a5e
SL
6910@ifset NIOSII
6911@ifclear GENERIC
6912@raisesections
6913@end ifclear
6914
6915@node Nios II
6916@section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6917@cindex Nios II call relaxation
6918@kindex --relax on Nios II
6919
6920Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
6921transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
6922which may result in @command{ld} giving
6923@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6924The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
6925trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
6926outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
6927trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
6928be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
6929larger than 256MB.
6930
6931The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
6932is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
6933@option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
6934locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
6935source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
6936register as a temporary.
6937
6938Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
6939relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
6940option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
6941
6942@ifclear GENERIC
6943@lowersections
6944@end ifclear
6945@end ifset
6946
2a60a7a8
AM
6947@ifset POWERPC
6948@ifclear GENERIC
6949@raisesections
6950@end ifclear
6951
6952@node PowerPC ELF32
6953@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6954@cindex PowerPC long branches
6955@kindex --relax on PowerPC
6956Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
6957displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
6958@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6959@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
6960the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
6961section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
6962section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
6963@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
6964both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
6965considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
6966
6967@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
6968@table @option
6969@cindex PowerPC PLT
6970@kindex --bss-plt
6971@item --bss-plt
6972Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
6973generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
6974the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
6975writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
6976@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
6977PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
6978compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
6979BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
6980
016687f8
AM
6981@kindex --secure-plt
6982@item --secure-plt
6983@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
6984@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
6985when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
6986layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
6987style BSS PLT.
6988
2a60a7a8
AM
6989@cindex PowerPC GOT
6990@kindex --sdata-got
6991@item --sdata-got
6992The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
6993sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
6994@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
6995section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
6996@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
6997@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
6998@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
6999@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7000PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7001pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7002GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7003really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7004
7005@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7006@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7007@item --emit-stub-syms
7008This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7009symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7010
7011@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7012@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7013@item --no-tls-optimize
7014PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7015sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7016disable the optimization.
7017@end table
7018
7019@ifclear GENERIC
7020@lowersections
7021@end ifclear
7022@end ifset
7023
7024@ifset POWERPC64
7025@ifclear GENERIC
7026@raisesections
7027@end ifclear
7028
7029@node PowerPC64 ELF64
7030@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7031
7032@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7033@table @option
7034@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7035@kindex --stub-group-size
7036@item --stub-group-size
7037Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7038by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7039@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7040sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7041a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7042the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7043conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7044prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7045A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7046branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7047@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7048@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7049detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7050positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7051
7052Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7053single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7054create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7055large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7056
7057@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7058@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7059@item --emit-stub-syms
7060This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7061symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7062
7063@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7064@kindex --dotsyms
7065@kindex --no-dotsyms
7066@item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
7067These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7068in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7069function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7070code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7071properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7072to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7073@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7074dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7075feature.
7076
7077@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7078@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7079@item --no-tls-optimize
7080PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7081sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7082disable the optimization.
7083
7084@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7085@kindex --no-opd-optimize
7086@item --no-opd-optimize
7087PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7088corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 7089the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
7090Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7091
7092@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7093@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7094@item --non-overlapping-opd
7095Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7096@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7097the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7098entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7099
7100@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7101@kindex --no-toc-optimize
7102@item --no-toc-optimize
7103PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7104entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7105reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7106marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7107marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7108relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7109unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7110reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7111discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7112reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7113code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7114optimization.
7115
7116@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7117@kindex --no-multi-toc
7118@item --no-multi-toc
794e51c0
AM
7119If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7120@code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7121where TOC
2a60a7a8
AM
7122entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7123total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7124grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7125TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7126calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7127help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
712864K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7129Use this option to turn off this feature.
794e51c0
AM
7130
7131@cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7132@kindex --no-toc-sort
7133@item --no-toc-sort
7134By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7135happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7136placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7137with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7138referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7139@code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7140results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7141off this feature.
7142
7143@cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7144@kindex --plt-align
7145@kindex --no-plt-align
7146@item --plt-align
7147@itemx --no-plt-align
7148Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
e05fa0ba
AM
7149padded so that they don't cross a 32-byte boundary, or to the
7150specified power of two boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. Note
7151that this isn't alignment in the usual sense. By default PLT call
7152stubs are packed tightly.
794e51c0
AM
7153
7154@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7155@kindex --plt-static-chain
7156@kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7157@item --plt-static-chain
7158@itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7159Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7160chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7161chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7162
7163@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7164@kindex --plt-thread-safe
7165@kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7166@item --plt-thread-safe
7167@itemx --no-thread-safe
7168With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7169lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7170another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7171order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7172memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7173barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7174looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7175seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7176default behaviour.
2a60a7a8
AM
7177@end table
7178
7179@ifclear GENERIC
7180@lowersections
7181@end ifclear
7182@end ifset
7183
49fa1e15
AM
7184@ifset SPU
7185@ifclear GENERIC
7186@raisesections
7187@end ifclear
7188
7189@node SPU ELF
7190@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7191
7192@cindex SPU ELF options
7193@table @option
7194
7195@cindex SPU plugins
7196@kindex --plugin
7197@item --plugin
7198This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7199
7200@cindex SPU overlays
7201@kindex --no-overlays
7202@item --no-overlays
7203Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7204regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7205@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7206turns off all this special overlay handling.
7207
7208@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7209@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7210@item --emit-stub-syms
7211This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7212symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7213
7214@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7215@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7216@item --extra-overlay-stubs
7217This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7218function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7219on calls to non-overlay regions.
7220
7221@cindex SPU local store size
7222@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7223@item --local-store=lo:hi
7224@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7225the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7226range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7227
c0065db7 7228@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7229@kindex --stack-analysis
7230@item --stack-analysis
7231SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7232unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7233under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7234@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7235@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7236determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7237for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7238for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7239for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7240find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7241and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7242under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7243dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7244is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7245and calls will be given.
7246
c0065db7 7247@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7248@kindex --emit-stack-syms
7249@item --emit-stack-syms
7250This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7251in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7252These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7253functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7254functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7255such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7256The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 7257@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
7258@end table
7259
7260@ifclear GENERIC
7261@lowersections
7262@end ifclear
7263@end ifset
7264
36f63dca
NC
7265@ifset TICOFF
7266@ifclear GENERIC
7267@raisesections
7268@end ifclear
7269
7270@node TI COFF
7271@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7272@cindex TI COFF versions
7273@kindex --format=@var{version}
7274The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7275TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7276also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7277format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7278header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7279
7280@ifclear GENERIC
7281@lowersections
7282@end ifclear
7283@end ifset
7284
2ca22b03
NC
7285@ifset WIN32
7286@ifclear GENERIC
7287@raisesections
7288@end ifclear
7289
7290@node WIN32
7291@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7292
c0065db7 7293This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 7294See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 7295command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
7296
7297@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7298@cindex import libraries
7299@item import libraries
69da35b5 7300The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 7301libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
7302regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7303archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
7304support for creating such libraries provided with the
7305@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7306
c0065db7
RM
7307@item exporting DLL symbols
7308@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
7309The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7310
7311@table @emph
7312@item using auto-export functionality
7313@cindex using auto-export functionality
7314By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7315which is controlled by the following command line options:
7316
0a5d968e
NC
7317@itemize
7318@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7319@item --exclude-symbols
7320@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 7321@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 7322@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
7323@end itemize
7324
09e2aba4
DK
7325When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7326(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7327symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7328often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7329private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
9d5777a3 7330options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
09e2aba4
DK
7331exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7332final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7333
7334If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
7335command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7336if either of the following are true:
7337
7338@itemize
7339@item A DEF file is used.
7340@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7341@end itemize
dc8465bf 7342
c0065db7
RM
7343@item using a DEF file
7344@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
7345Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7346an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7347exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7348name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 7349command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
7350
7351@example
7352gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7353@end example
7354
0a5d968e
NC
7355Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7356@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7357
dc8465bf
NC
7358Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7359
7360@example
4b5bd4e7 7361LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
7362
7363EXPORTS
7364foo
7365bar
7366_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
7367another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7368var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
7369doo = foo == foo2
7370eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 7371@end example
dc8465bf 7372
7fcab871 7373This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
7374symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7375alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7376by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7377@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
7378@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7379export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7380in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7381symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 7382
6b31ad16
DS
7383The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7384name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7385the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7386
b45619c0
NC
7387When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7388library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 7389@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 7390executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
7391
7392With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7393specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 7394non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
7395
7396If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
7397or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7398filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 7399
4b5bd4e7
DS
7400The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7401
7402@example
7403EXPORTS
7404 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7405 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 7406 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 7407@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
7408
7409Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7410@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7411@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7412@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7413Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
7414@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7415string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
7416
7417The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7418
7419@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7420will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7421by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7422linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7423library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7424
7425@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7426The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7427the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7428@code{*_imp__foo}).
7429
7430@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7431well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7432read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7433variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7434the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7435extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7436application will behave unexpectedly.
7437
7438@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7439it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7440symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7441API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7442the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 7443
4b5bd4e7
DS
7444See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7445other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
7446
7447@cindex creating a DEF file
7448While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7449with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
7450
7451@item Using decorations
7452@cindex Using decorations
7453Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7454itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7455declared as:
7456
7457@example
7458__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7459__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7460@end example
7461
7462All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7463any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7464this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7465the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7466
7467Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 7468decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
7469instead:
7470
7471@example
7472__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7473__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7474@end example
7475
c0065db7
RM
7476This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7477when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
7478variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7479code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 7480of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
7481omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7482@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 7483information.
c0065db7 7484@end table
dc8465bf 7485
2ca22b03
NC
7486@cindex automatic data imports
7487@item automatic data imports
7488The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 7489by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 7490compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 7491issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 7492code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 7493c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 7494initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 7495decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 7496platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
7497command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7498The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7499suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7500trigger the feature's use.
7501
c0065db7 7502auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
7503additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7504
c0065db7 7505"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
7506documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7507
c0065db7
RM
7508The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7509occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7510One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
7511below.
7512
7513@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
7514For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7515object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7516offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7517field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7518in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 7519without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 7520The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
7521references.
7522
c0065db7
RM
7523The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7524be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7525themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7526runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7527compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7528support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
7529run without error on an older system.
7530
c0065db7
RM
7531@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7532enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
7533
7534@cindex direct linking to a dll
7535@item direct linking to a dll
7536The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7537including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 7538libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 7539traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
7540libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7541function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7542though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 7543storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 7544tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
7545large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7546
c0065db7 7547Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 7548@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 7549of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
7550perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7551select the dll instead of an import library.
7552
2ca22b03 7553
69da35b5
NC
7554For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7555to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
7556
7557@example
45e948fe
NC
7558libxxx.dll.a
7559xxx.dll.a
7560libxxx.a
7561xxx.lib
69da35b5 7562cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
7563libxxx.dll
7564xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
7565@end example
7566
69da35b5
NC
7567before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7568
c0065db7
RM
7569(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7570where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7571@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7572file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
7573@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7574
c0065db7
RM
7575Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7576@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
7577was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7578various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7579could coexist on the same machine.
7580
2ca22b03
NC
7581The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7582applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 7583libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
7584
7585@example
7586bin/
7587 cygxxx.dll
7588lib/
7589 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 7590 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
7591@end example
7592
c0065db7
RM
7593Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7594done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
7595
75961. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7597@example
7598gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7599@end example
2ca22b03 7600
69da35b5
NC
7601However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7602(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7603@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7604not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7605
2ca22b03
NC
76062. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7607directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7608should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7609making the app/dll.
7610
7611@example
7612ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 7613@end example
2ca22b03
NC
7614
7615Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7616
7617@example
7618gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7619@end example
69da35b5
NC
7620
7621This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7622perfectly legal
7623
7624@example
7625bin/
7626 cygxxx-5.dll
7627lib/
c0065db7 7628 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
7629@end example
7630
dc8465bf 7631Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
7632even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7633@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7634
7635Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 7636wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
7637
76381. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7639work with auto-imported data.
7640
dc8465bf
NC
76412. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7642import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7643symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7644for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7645possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 7646
45e948fe
NC
76473. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7648critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7649in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7650stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7651
69da35b5 7652So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
7653true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7654a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7655binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
7656massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7657requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7658will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 7659
c0065db7 7660@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 7661@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7662@item adding additional names
7663Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
7664A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7665exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7666when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 7667import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 7668
c0065db7 7669@example
dc8465bf
NC
7670LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7671
7672EXPORTS
c0065db7 7673foo
dc8465bf 7674_foo = foo
c0065db7 7675@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7676
7677The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7678
7679Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7680source code using the "weak" attribute:
7681
c0065db7
RM
7682@example
7683void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 7684void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 7685@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7686
7687See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7688symbols.
7689
7690@item renaming symbols
7691Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 7692kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
7693@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7694DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 7695created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 7696
c0065db7 7697@example
dc8465bf
NC
7698LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7699
7700EXPORTS
7701_foo = foo
c0065db7 7702@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7703
7704The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7705@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 7706@end table
dc8465bf 7707
0a5d968e 7708Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 7709unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 7710If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
7711@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7712that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7713@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7714renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7715to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7716the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7717In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 7718which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
7719
7720@cindex weak externals
7721@item weak externals
7722The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7723weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7724defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7725are three variants of weak externals:
7726@itemize
7727@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7728called lazy externals.
7729@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7730This form is not presently implemented.
7731@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7732implemented.
7733@end itemize
7734As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7735are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7736uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
7737
7738@cindex aligned common symbols
7739@item aligned common symbols
7740As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7741desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
7742the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7743carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7744by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
7745tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7746but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7747warnings about unknown linker directives.
5063daf7 7748
2ca22b03
NC
7749@end table
7750
7751@ifclear GENERIC
7752@lowersections
7753@end ifclear
7754@end ifset
7755
e0001a05
NC
7756@ifset XTENSA
7757@ifclear GENERIC
7758@raisesections
7759@end ifclear
7760
7761@node Xtensa
7762@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
7763
7764@cindex Xtensa processors
7765The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7766@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7767specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7768keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
7769example, with the command:
7770
7771@smallexample
7772SECTIONS
7773@{
7774 .text : @{
7775 *(.literal .text)
7776 @}
7777@}
7778@end smallexample
7779
7780@noindent
7781@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7782and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7783literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
7784interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7785group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7786files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7787and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 7788
43cd72b9 7789@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 7790@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
7791Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7792provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
7793is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
7794literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7795will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7796location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7797the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
7798unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7799@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7800range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7801
7802For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7803to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7804instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7805instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7806instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
7807@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7808hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7809By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7810switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7811density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7812instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
7813performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7814linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7815a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7816
7817The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7818control the linker:
7819
7820@cindex Xtensa options
7821@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
7822@item --size-opt
7823When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7824more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7825no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7826alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7827preserve the correctness of the code.
7828@end table
e0001a05
NC
7829
7830@ifclear GENERIC
7831@lowersections
7832@end ifclear
7833@end ifset
7834
252b5132
RH
7835@ifclear SingleFormat
7836@node BFD
7837@chapter BFD
7838
7839@cindex back end
7840@cindex object file management
7841@cindex object formats available
7842@kindex objdump -i
7843The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
7844These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
7845object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
7846format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
7847it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
7848associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
7849object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
7850(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
7851list all the formats available for your configuration.
7852
7853@cindex BFD requirements
7854@cindex requirements for BFD
7855As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
7856several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
7857BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
7858formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
7859been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
7860BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
7861may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
7862
7863One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
7864mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
7865useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
7866conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
7867
7868@menu
7869* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
7870@end menu
7871
7872@node BFD outline
36f63dca 7873@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
7874@cindex opening object files
7875@include bfdsumm.texi
7876@end ifclear
7877
7878@node Reporting Bugs
7879@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
7880@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
7881@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 7882
ff5dcc92 7883Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
7884
7885Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
7886it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 7887to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 7888work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 7889@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7890
7891In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7892information that enables us to fix the bug.
7893
7894@menu
7895* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7896* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7897@end menu
7898
7899@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 7900@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
7901@cindex bug criteria
7902
7903If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7904
7905@itemize @bullet
7906@cindex fatal signal
7907@cindex linker crash
7908@cindex crash of linker
7909@item
7910If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 7911@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
7912
7913@cindex error on valid input
7914@item
ff5dcc92 7915If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
7916
7917@cindex invalid input
7918@item
ff5dcc92 7919If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
7920may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
7921object files are correct.
7922
7923@item
7924If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 7925improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
7926@end itemize
7927
7928@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 7929@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 7930@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 7931@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
7932
7933A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 7934products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
7935recommend you contact that organization first.
7936
7937You can find contact information for many support companies and
7938individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7939distribution.
7940
ad22bfe8 7941@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 7942Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
7943@value{BUGURL}.
7944@end ifset
252b5132
RH
7945
7946The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7947@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7948fact or leave it out, state it!
7949
7950Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7951problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
7952assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
7953matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
7954the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
7955location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
7956were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
7957into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
7958specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 7959and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
7960
7961Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
7962the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
7963on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
7964
7965Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
7966bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7967respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7968You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
7969
7970To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7971
7972@itemize @bullet
7973@item
ff5dcc92 7974The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
7975the @samp{--version} argument.
7976
7977Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 7978the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7979
7980@item
ff5dcc92 7981Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
7982patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
7983
7984@item
7985The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7986version number.
7987
7988@item
ff5dcc92 7989What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
7990``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7991
7992@item
7993The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
7994observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
7995list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
7996sufficient.
7997
7998If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7999and then we might not encounter the bug.
8000
8001@item
8002A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
8003bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8004provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8005bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8006state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8007requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8008we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8009attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
8010
8011If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8012@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8013object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8014@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8015how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8016
8017@item
8018A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8019incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8020
ff5dcc92 8021Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
8022will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8023not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8024a chance to make a mistake.
8025
8026Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8027say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 8028copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
8029C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8030and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8031fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8032you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8033any conclusion from our observations.
8034
8035@item
ff5dcc92 8036If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
8037diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8038@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 8039If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
8040context, not by line number.
8041
8042The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8043sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8044@end itemize
8045
8046Here are some things that are not necessary:
8047
8048@itemize @bullet
8049@item
8050A description of the envelope of the bug.
8051
8052Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8053which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8054changes will not affect it.
8055
8056This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8057will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8058with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8059We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8060
8061Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8062of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8063output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8064less time, and so on.
8065
8066However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8067report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8068
8069@item
8070A patch for the bug.
8071
8072A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8073the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8074a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8075to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8076
ff5dcc92 8077Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
8078construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8079through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8080able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8081fixed.
8082
8083And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8084patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8085help us to understand.
8086
8087@item
8088A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8089
8090Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8091things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8092@end itemize
8093
8094@node MRI
8095@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8096@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
8097To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8098linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
8099alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8100described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8101simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 8102@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
8103linker commands; these commands are described here.
8104
8105In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8106file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8107features to make use of them.
8108
8109You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8110@samp{-c} command-line option.
8111
8112Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8113command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8114blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 8115MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8116issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8117
8118Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8119
8120You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8121lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8122The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8123
8124@table @code
8125@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8126@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8127@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8128Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
8129the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8130@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8131your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8132script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8133commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8134input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8135@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8136
8137@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8138@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8139Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8140in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8141
8142@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8143
8144@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8145@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8146Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8147@var{expression} should be a power of two.
8148
8149@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8150@item BASE @var{expression}
8151Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8152absolute addresses) in the output file.
8153
8154@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8155@item CHIP @var{expression}
8156@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8157This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8158
8159@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8160@item END
8161This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8162
8163@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8164@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8165Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 8166language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
8167
8168@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 8169@item
252b5132
RH
8170S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8171
8172@item
8173IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
8174
8175@item
8176COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
8177@samp{COFF}
8178@end enumerate
8179
8180@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8181@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8182Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 8183@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
8184
8185The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8186same line, with no change in its effect.
8187
8188@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8189@item LOAD @var{filename}
8190@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8191Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 8192same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8193command line.
8194
8195@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8196@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 8197@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
8198MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8199option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8200
8201@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8202@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8203@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8204Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
8205order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8206script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8207sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8208file, in the order specified.
8209
8210@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8211@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8212@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8213@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8214Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8215@var{name} used in the linker input files.
8216
8217@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8218@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8219@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8220@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8221You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8222specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8223If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8224@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8225@end table
8226
793c5807
NC
8227@node GNU Free Documentation License
8228@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 8229@include fdl.texi
704c465c 8230
370b66a1
CD
8231@node LD Index
8232@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
8233
8234@printindex cp
8235
8236@tex
7ca01ed9 8237% I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
252b5132
RH
8238% meantime:
8239\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8240\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8241\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8242\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8243\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8244\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8245\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8246\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8247\page\colophon
7ca01ed9 8248% Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
252b5132
RH
8249@end tex
8250
252b5132 8251@bye
This page took 1.213047 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.